JVC Home Theater System TH C90 User Manual

DVD DIGITAL CINEMA SYSTEM  
TH-C90  
Consists of XV-THC90, SP-PWC90,  
SP-THC90F, SP-THC90C and SP-THC90S  
TH-C60  
Consists of XV-THC60, SP-PWC60,  
SP-THC60F, SP-THC60C and SP-THC60S  
TH-C20  
Consists of XV-THC20, SP-PWC20,  
SP-THC20F, SP-THC20C and SP-THC20S  
INSTRUCTIONS  
LVT1504-005B  
[US, UG, UX]  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Warnings, Cautions and Others  
Caution: Proper Ventilation  
To avoid risk of electric shock and fire and to protect from damage, place the apparatus on a level surface. The minimal clearances are  
shown below:  
Wall or  
XV-THC90/XV-THC60/  
XV-THC20  
XV-THC90/XV-THC60/  
XV-THC20  
Wall or  
obstructions  
obstructions  
8 cm  
3 cm  
Front  
10 cm  
3 cm  
No  
obstructions  
15 cm  
Wall or obstructions  
Wall or  
obstructions  
20 cm  
SP-PWC90/  
SP-PWC60/  
SP-PWC20  
SP-PWC90/SP-PWC60/  
SP-PWC20  
Front  
No  
15 cm  
15 cm  
15 cm  
obstructions  
CAUTION!  
To avoid personal injury  
or accidentally dropping  
the unit, have two persons  
unpack, carry, and install  
the unit.  
SP-THC90: 47 kg  
SP-THC60: 32.5 kg  
CAUTION  
• Do not block the ventilation openings or holes.  
(If the ventilation openings or holes are blocked by a  
newspaper or cloth, etc., the heat may not be able to get out.)  
• Do not place any naked flame sources, such as lighted  
candles, on the apparatus.  
• When discarding batteries, environmental problems must be  
considered and local rules or laws governing the disposal of  
these batteries must be followed strictly.  
• Do not expose this apparatus to rain, moisture, dripping or  
splashing and that no objects filled with liquids, such as  
vases, shall be placed on the apparatus.  
[European Union only]  
G-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of contents  
Introduction ....................................................2  
Notes on handling ..................................................................... 2  
Supplied accessories .................................................................. 2  
Playback ........................................................ 21  
Basic playback ...........................................................................21  
One Touch Replay ...................................................................23  
Fast-forward/fast-reverse search ............................................23  
Skip to the beginning of a desired selection .........................24  
Skipping at about 5-minute intervals ....................................24  
Locating a desired title/group using number buttons ........24  
Playing back a bonus group ....................................................25  
Selecting the desired title/playlist from the control display .....25  
About discs ......................................................3  
Playable disc types ..................................................................... 3  
Playable file types ....................................................................... 4  
Description of parts and controls ..................5  
Connections .....................................................8  
Advanced operations ................................... 26  
Using the surround mode .......................................................26  
Using the on-screen bar ..........................................................27  
Playing from a specified position on a disc ..........................29  
Using the file control display ..................................................30  
Resume Playback ......................................................................31  
Selecting a view angle ..............................................................31  
Selecting the subtitle ................................................................31  
Selecting the audio ...................................................................32  
Special picture playback ..........................................................32  
Program Playback ....................................................................34  
Random Playback ....................................................................35  
Repeat Playback ........................................................................35  
Tray lock ....................................................................................36  
Setting the sound balance .......................................................36  
Connecting the FM and AM antennas ................................... 8  
Connecting the satellite (front, center, surround) speakers ......  
9
Speaker layout .......................................................................... 13  
Connecting a TV ...................................................................... 13  
Connecting the powered subwoofer ..................................... 14  
Connecting to an analog component ................................... 14  
Connecting a cassette recorder (Only for TH-C90) ........... 14  
Connecting to a digital component ...................................... 14  
Connecting a USB mass storage class device ....................... 15  
Connecting the power cord .................................................... 15  
Operating external components with the  
remote control ..............................................16  
Operating the TV ..................................................................... 16  
Operating the DBS tuner or CATV converter .................... 17  
Operating the VCR .................................................................. 17  
Setting DVD preferences ............................. 37  
Using the setup menus ............................................................37  
Menu description .....................................................................37  
Basic operations ............................................18  
Turning the system on/off ...................................................... 18  
Selecting the source to play .................................................... 19  
Adjusting the volume [VOLUME] ....................................... 19  
Listening with headphones (not supplied) .......................... 19  
Turning off the sound temporarily [MUTING] ................. 19  
Adjusting the brightness of the indications [DIMMER] ... 19  
Sleep Timer [SLEEP] ............................................................... 20  
Adjusting the output level of the subwoofer and speakers ......20  
Adjusting the sound ................................................................ 20  
Changing the scan mode ........................................................ 20  
Tuner operations .......................................... 39  
Setting the AM tuner interval spacing ..................................39  
Manual tuning ..........................................................................39  
Preset tuning .............................................................................40  
Selecting the FM reception mode ..........................................40  
Reducing the noise of AM broadcast ....................................40  
Karaoke operations ...................................... 41  
Basic Karaoke operations ........................................................41  
Reserving songs ........................................................................42  
Selecting audio ..........................................................................42  
Adding an echo effect to your voice ......................................43  
Shifting the pitch of the playback sound ..............................43  
References .................................................... 44  
Maintenance .............................................................................44  
Troubleshooting .......................................................................44  
Specifications ............................................................................45  
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
7 Safety precautions  
Avoid moisture, water and dust  
Notes on handling  
7 Important cautions  
Installation of the system  
• Select a place which is level, dry and neither too hot nor too cold;  
between 5°C and 35°C.  
Do not place the system in moist or dusty places.  
Avoid high temperatures  
Do not expose the system to direct sunlight and do not place it near  
a heating device.  
When you are away  
When away on travel or for other reasons for an extended period of  
time, disconnect the power cord plugs from the wall outlet.  
• Leave sufficient distance between the system and the TV.  
• Do not use the system in a place subject to vibration.  
Power cord  
Do not block the vents  
Blocking the vents may damage the system.  
• Do not handle the power cord with wet hands.  
• A small amount of power is always consumed while the power  
cord is connected to the wall outlet (center unit only).  
• When unplugging the power cord from the wall outlet, always  
pull on the plug, not the power cord.  
Care of the cabinet  
When cleaning the system, use a soft cloth and follow the relevant  
instructions on the use of chemically-coated cloths. Do not use  
benzene, thinner or other organic solvents including disinfectants.  
These may cause deformation or discoloring.  
To prevent malfunctions of the system  
• There are no user-serviceable parts inside. If anything goes  
wrong, unplug the power cord and consult your dealer.  
• Do not insert any metallic object into the system.  
• Do not use any non-standard shape disc (like a heart, flower or  
credit card, etc.) available on the market, because it may damage  
the system.  
If water gets inside the system  
Turn the system off and disconnect the power cord plug from the  
wall outlet, then call the store where you made your purchase. Using  
the system in this condition may cause a fire or electrical shock.  
• Do not use a disc with tape, stickers, or paste on it, because it may  
damage the system.  
Supplied accessories  
Label sticker  
Check to be sure you have all of the supplied accessories.  
The number in parentheses is the quantity of the pieces supplied.  
If anything is missing, contact your dealer immediately.  
• Remote control (1)  
Sticker  
Paste  
• Batteries (2)  
• FM antenna (1)  
• AM loop antenna (1)  
Note about copyright laws  
• Power cord (1)  
Check the copyright laws in your country before recording from the  
discs. Recording of copyrighted material may infringe copyright  
laws.  
• System cord (1)  
• Composite video cord (1)  
• AC plug adapters (2) (except for the countries of the Middle East)  
• Speaker cords (only for TH-C90/TH-C60)  
4 m: For satellite (front left/right) and center speakers (3)  
10 m: For satellite speakers (surround left/right) (2)  
• Screws  
Note about copyguard system  
The discs are protected by copyguard system. When you connect  
the system to your VCR directly, the copyguard system activates and  
the picture may not be played back correctly.  
TH-C90:  
M4 x 30 mm (8)  
TH-C60:  
M5 x 40 mm (4)  
M4 x 20 mm (8)  
• Speaker cord clamps (only for TH-C60) (4)  
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
About discs  
Notes on DVD-R and DVD-RW  
• This system does not support “multi-border” disc.  
Playable disc types  
Notes on CD-R and CD-RW  
• This system can play CD-Rs or CD-RWs recorded with ISO 9660  
format.  
This system has been designed to play back the following discs:  
DVD VIDEO  
DVD AUDIO  
• This system supports “multi-session” discs (up to 20 sessions).  
• This system cannot play “packet write” discs.  
Region code of DVD VIDEO  
VCD/SVCD  
Audio CD  
DVD VIDEO players and DVD VIDEO discs have their own  
Region Code numbers. This system can play back DVD VIDEO  
discs whose Region Code numbers include the system’s Region  
Code, which is indicated on the rear panel.  
• Example of playable DVD:  
For the countries of the Middle East  
The in the list below shows available disc types and recording  
formats.  
Disc type  
For the countries of the Southeast Asia  
1
1
1
CD-R/-RW*  
DVD-R*  
DVD-RW*  
Recording  
format  
DVD Video  
DVD Audio  
DVD VR  
VCD/SVCD  
Audio CD  
MP3  
If a DVD with an improper Region Code number is loaded,  
“REGION CODE ERROR!” appears on the TV screen and playback  
cannot start.  
Some discs may not be played back because of their disc  
characteristics, recording conditions, or damage or stain on them.  
2
2
*  
*  
2
2
WMA  
*  
*  
2
2
Unplayable discs  
JPEG  
*  
*  
DVD-ROM, DVD-RAM, CD-I (CD-I Ready), Photo CD, SACD,  
2
2
ASF  
*  
*  
etc.  
3
2
2
MPEG-2  
MPEG-1  
DivX  
*  
*  
*  
Playing back these discs will generate noise and damage the  
speakers.  
3
2
2
*  
*  
*  
2
2
*  
*  
1
2
3
*
*
*
This system can play finalized discs only.  
Recorded with UDF Bridge format.  
This system may not be able to play back a file if the file size is  
too large.  
• It is possible to play back finalized +R/+RW (DVD Video Format  
only) discs. “DVD” lights on the display panel when a +R/+RW  
disc is loaded.  
• This system accommodates the NTSC and PAL system. When  
you play an NTSC disc with the scan mode set to PAL (see page  
20), the NTSC video signal is converted to the PAL60 signal and  
output.  
• The Non-DVD side of a “DualDisc” does not comply with the  
“Compact Disc Digital Audio” standard. Therefore, the use of  
Non-DVD side of a DualDisc on this product may not be  
recommended.  
• On some DVD VIDEOs, DVD AUDIOs, VCDs or SVCDs,  
their actual operation may be different from what is explained  
in this manual. This is due to the disc programming and disc  
structure, not a malfunction of this system.  
DVD Logo is a trademark of DVD Format/Logo Licensing  
Corporation.  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
About discs  
For JPEG files  
• We recommend to record a file at 640 x 480 resolution. (If a file  
has been recorded at a resolution of more than 640 x 480, it will  
take a longer time to be displayed.)  
Playable file types  
For all playable files  
• This system can only play baseline JPEG files.  
• The system can only recognize and play files with one of the  
following extensions, which can be in any combination of upper  
and lower case;  
For ASF files  
• The system supports the types of the advanced simple profile as  
MPEG-4 files (MPEG-4 ASF).  
• The system supports MPEG-4 files with the following conditions:  
File format: ASF  
Visual profile: MPEG-4 SP (Simple Profile)  
Audio CODEC: G.726  
MP3: .MP3, “.mp3”  
WMA: .WMA”, “.wma”  
JPEG: .JPG, “.JPEG, “.jpg, “.jpeg”  
ASF: .ASF, “.asf ”  
MPEG-2/MPEG-1: .MPG, “.MPEG, “.mpg, “.mpeg”  
DivX: .DIVX, “.DIV, “.divx, “.div, and .AVI, “.avi”  
• Some files may not be played back. In this case, “NOT  
SUPPORTED” appears on the TV screen.  
Max. picture size: 352 x 288 (CIF)  
Max. bit rate: 384 kbps  
• Some files may not be played back normally because of their disc  
characteristics or recording conditions.  
• The system recognizes up to 150 tracks (files) per group, 99  
groups per disc/device, and the total number of the tracks (files)  
that the system can play is 4000.  
• MP3/WMA/JPEG/ASF/MPEG-2/MPEG-1/DivX files require a  
longer readout time. (It differs due to the complexity of the  
directory/file configuration.)  
• If different kinds of files are mixed, set the FILE TYPE setting in  
the PICTURE menu to the appropriate setting for the data to be  
read (AUDIO, STILL PICTURE” or “VIDEO”). (See page 38.)  
For MPEG-2/MPEG-1 files  
• The stream format should conform to MPEG system/program  
stream.  
• 720 x 576 pixels (25 fps)/720 x 480 pixels (30 fps) is  
recommended for the highest resolution.  
• This system also supports the resolutions of 352 x 576/480 x 576/  
352 x 288 pixels (25 fps) and 352 x 480/480 x 480/352 x 240 pixels  
(30 fps).  
• The file format should be MP@ML (Main Profile at Main Level)/  
SP@ML (Simple Profile at Main Level)/MP@LL (Main Profile at  
Low Level).  
• Audio streams should conform to MPEG1 Audio Layer-2 or  
MPEG2 Audio Layer-2.  
For MP3/WMA files  
• The system supports MP3/WMA files recorded with a bit rate of  
32 – 320 kbps and a sampling frequency of 16 kHz, 22.05 kHz,  
24 kHz*, 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, or 48 kHz.  
• If the track information (track title, artist, and album name, etc.)  
is recorded, it appears in the file control display on the TV screen.  
(See page 30.)  
For DivX files  
• The system supports DivX 6.x, 5.x, 4.x and 3.11.  
• The system supports DivX files whose resolution is 720 x 480  
pixels or less (30 fps), and 720 x 576 pixels or less (25 fps).  
• Audio stream should conform to Dolby Digital (including multi  
channel) or MPEG1 Audio Layer-3 (MP3).  
• The system does not support GMC (Global Motion  
Compression).  
We recommend to record each piece of material (song) at a  
sample rate of 44.1 kHz and at a data transfer rate of  
128 (96*) kbps.  
* For WMA only  
• The file encoded in the interlaced scanning mode may not be  
played back correctly.  
• The system has its own Registration Code for DivX playback.  
• If necessary, you can confirm the Registration Code of your  
system using the OTHERS menu. (See page 39.)  
• This product incorporates copyright protection technology that  
is protected by U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights.  
Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized  
by Macrovision, and is intended for home and other limited  
viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision.  
Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited.  
• “CONSUMERS SHOULD NOTE THAT NOT ALL HIGH  
DEFINITION TELEVISION SETS ARE FULLY COMPATIBLE  
WITH THIS PRODUCT AND MAY CAUSE ARTIFACTS TO  
BE DISPLAYED IN THE PICTURE. IN CASE OF 525 OR 625  
PROGRESSIVE SCAN PICTURE PROBLEMS, IT IS  
RECOMMENDED THAT THE USER SWITCH THE  
CONNECTION TO THE ‘STANDARD DEFINITION’  
OUTPUT.  
• USE OF THIS PRODUCT IN ANY MANNER THAT  
COMPLIES WITH THE MPEG-4 VISUAL STANDARD IS  
PROHIBITED, EXCEPT FOR USE BY A CONSUMER  
ENGAGING IN PERSONAL AND NON-COMMERCIAL  
ACTIVITIES.  
• DivX, DivX Ultra Certified, and associated logos are trademarks  
of DivX, Inc. and are used under license.  
• Official DivX® Ultra Certified product  
• Plays all versions of DivX video (including DivX 6) with  
enhanced playback of DivX® media files and the DivX® Media  
Format  
®
®
IF THERE ARE QUESTIONS REGARDING OUR TV SET  
COMPATIBILITY WITH THIS MODEL 525p AND 625p DVD  
PLAYER, PLEASE CONTACT OUR CUSTOMER SERVICE  
CENTER.”  
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Description of parts and controls  
Front panel (center unit)  
The numbers in the figures indicate the pages where the details of the parts are described.  
Display window  
23  
27  
39  
40  
22  
27  
20  
22  
24  
25  
34  
31  
35, 36  
19  
22  
33  
22  
40  
39  
35  
41  
21  
21  
21  
23, 39  
Disc tray (inside): 21  
Remote sensor: 7  
19  
18  
18  
21  
41  
15  
19  
Rear panel (center unit)  
Only for TH-C90: 14  
14  
8
14  
15  
13  
13  
14  
14  
IMPORTANT  
Illustrations used in this manual are of TH-C90 unless mentioned  
otherwise.  
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Description of parts and controls  
Powered subwoofer  
Front  
SP-PWC90  
SP-PWC60  
SP-PWC20  
POWER ON  
lamp: 18  
POWER ON  
lamp: 18  
POWER ON  
lamp: 18  
Rear  
SP-PWC90  
SP-PWC60  
SP-PWC20  
11  
14  
12  
14  
12  
See below.  
Power cord: 15  
See below.  
See below.  
14  
Power cord: 15  
Power cord: 15  
NOTE  
* Do not block the ventilation openings to allow proper air  
circulation by the cooling fan.  
• For safety reasons, always ensure that there is sufficient space behind  
the powered subwoofer.  
Setting the VOLTAGE SELECTOR  
Before plugging, set the correct voltage for your area with the voltage selector switch on the rear panel of the powered subwoofer.  
Voltage selector switch  
Voltage selector switch  
For SP-PWC60/SP-PWC20  
For SP-PWC90  
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Description of parts and controls  
Remote control  
Putting batteries in the remote control  
18  
17  
19  
21  
16  
16  
R03 (UM-4)/AAA (24F) type dry-cell  
batteries (supplied)  
Number  
buttons: 24  
16, 43  
16  
16 - 41  
25, 29  
41 - 43  
25, 29  
20 - 42  
If the range or effectiveness of the remote control decreases, replace  
both batteries.  
16, 19  
CAUTION  
27 - 36  
• Do not expose batteries to heat or flame.  
19  
Operating the system from the remote control  
Aim the remote control directly to the front panel of the center unit.  
• Do not block the remote sensor.  
17, 23  
21, 40  
24, 39  
31, 33  
31, 32, 42  
35  
21, 40  
21  
23, 32  
33  
27  
34, 42  
24  
29  
34, 35  
22  
37  
36  
21, 31, 33  
20  
20  
20  
20  
20, 33  
19  
• The button shaded in the illustration (TAPE) is only for TH-  
C90.  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Do not connect the power cord until all other connections have been made.  
Connections  
If reception is poor  
Connecting the FM and AM  
antennas  
Center unit  
7 AM loop antenna  
AM loop antenna  
Setting up supplied AM loop antenna  
Outdoor single vinyl-covered wire antenna  
(not supplied)  
If the antenna cord is covered with the insulation  
coat, twist and pull the insulation coat off and  
remove.  
7 FM antenna  
FM antenna (supplied)  
Center unit  
Connecting AM loop antenna  
Extend the supplied FM antenna  
horizontally.  
1
Center unit  
If reception is poor  
Center unit  
Outdoor FM antenna (not  
supplied)  
2
Standard type (75 Ω  
coaxial) connector  
Outdoor FM antenna cord (not  
supplied)  
Antenna cord  
3
NOTE  
• We recommend that you use coaxial cable for the FM antenna as it is  
well-shielded against interference.  
Turn the loop antenna until you have the best reception during  
AM broadcast program reception.  
NOTE  
• Make sure the antenna conductors do not touch any other terminals,  
connecting cords or power cords. This could cause poor reception.  
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Do not connect the power cord until all other connections have been made.  
Connections  
2
Connecting the satellite (front,  
center, surround) speakers  
Red  
Clear  
7 Assembling the front speakers — TH-C90  
Black striped  
Black  
7 Connecting the center and surround speakers — TH-C90  
Front speaker (SP-THC90F) (2)  
Base plate (2)  
Before assembling —  
• Prepare a Phillips screwdriver (not supplied).  
Take care not to drop any component part while assembling;  
otherwise, it may cause damage to the floor or injury.  
Center speaker  
(SP-THC90C) (1)  
Surround speaker  
(SP-THC90S) (2)  
1
Speaker  
Base plate  
Screw M4 x 30 mm  
(supplied)  
Clear  
Red  
Direction of the base plate:  
Make the short side front when fixing the base plate.  
Black striped  
Black  
Speaker (front side)  
To remove the speaker grilles:  
The speaker grilles of the satellite speakers are removable.  
The following procedure explains the removal of SP-THC90Ss  
speaker grille. You can remove speaker grilles of other speakers by  
the same procedure.  
Holes  
Projections  
CAUTION  
• NEVER insert your finger in between the speaker and the base plate,  
as it may get hurt.  
Speaker grille  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Do not connect the power cord until all other connections have been made.  
Connections  
7 Assembling the front and surround speakers — TH-C60  
3
White  
Red  
Black  
Black  
Base plate (4)  
Front speaker  
Surround  
speaker  
Stand (4)  
(SP-THC60F) (2)  
(SP-THC60S) (2)  
You can route the speaker cord  
by using speaker cord clamp  
(supplied).  
• Check the model name of each speaker from the label on the  
rear to locate each speaker correctly.  
Assembled speakers  
7 Connecting the center speaker — TH-C60  
or  
With stand: Refer to steps 1 to  
3.  
Without stand: Refer to steps  
2 and 3.  
Center speaker (SP-THC60C) (1)  
Before assembling —  
• Prepare a Phillips screwdriver (not supplied).  
Take care not to drop any component part while assembling;  
otherwise, it may cause damage to the floor or injury.  
1
Speaker  
Red  
White  
Stand  
Screw M5 x 40 mm (supplied)  
Black  
Black  
2
When assembling a speaker without stand:  
Speaker  
For TH-C20, the front, surround and center speakers are  
equipped with their speaker cords attached directly to their  
speaker unit instead of having speaker terminals on their cabinet.  
A: Use these screws (M4 x  
45 mm) when assembling the  
speaker with the base plate.  
Base plate  
Stand (or speaker  
directly)*  
Screw M4 x 20 mm  
(supplied)*  
* When assembling the speaker with the base plate, use the  
screws A.  
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Do not connect the power cord until all other connections have been made.  
Connections  
7 Connecting the satellite speakers to the subwoofer — TH-C90  
Before connecting the speaker cords;  
Twist and pull the insulation coat off and  
remove.  
Powered subwoofer  
SP-PWC90  
Speaker cord  
• Connect the black striped cords to the black (r) terminals.  
• Connect the clear cords to the (q) terminals referring to the table  
below:  
FRONT SPEAKERS (LEFT)  
FRONT SPEAKERS (RIGHT)  
CENTER SPEAKER  
White  
Red  
Green  
Blue  
SURROUND SPEAKERS (LEFT)  
SURROUND SPEAKERS (RIGHT)  
Gray  
Surround speakers  
SP-THC90S  
Front speakers  
SP-THC90F  
Center speaker  
SP-THC90C  
Precautions for daily use  
CAUTION  
• When moving the speakers, do not pull the speaker cords;  
otherwise, the speakers may fall over, causing damage or injury.  
• Do not reproduce sounds at so high a volume that the sound is  
distorted; otherwise, the speakers may be damaged by internal  
heat buildup.  
• If you connect speakers other than the supplied ones, use speakers of  
the same speaker impedance (SPEAKER IMPEDANCE) indicated  
near the speaker terminals on the rear of the powered subwoofer.  
• DO NOT connect more than one speaker to one speaker terminal.  
• When installing the surround speakers on the wall;  
• When holding a speaker, always grasp the lower portion.  
• Do not lean against the speakers, as the speakers could fall down  
or break, possibly causing an injury. Especially be careful that  
children do not lean against them.  
– Be sure to have them installed on the wall by qualified personnel.  
DO NOT install the satellite speakers on the wall by yourself to  
avoid unexpected damage from falling off the wall due to incorrect  
installation or weakness in wall structure.  
– Care must be taken in selecting a location for speaker installation  
on a wall. Injury to personnel or damage to equipment may result  
if the speakers installed interfere with daily activities.  
11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Do not connect the power cord until all other connections have been made.  
Connections  
7 Connecting the satellite speakers to the subwoofer — TH-C60/TH-C20  
Note that the illustration below is for SP-PWC60.  
Before connecting the speaker cords;  
Twist and pull the insulation coat off and remove.  
Speaker cord  
Powered subwoofer  
TH-C60: SP-PWC60  
TH-C20: SP-PWC20  
• Connect the black cords to the black (r) terminals.  
• Connect the white cords to the (q) terminals  
referring to the table below:  
Front speakers  
TH-C60: SP-THC60F  
TH-C20: SP-THC20F  
FRONT SPEAKERS (LEFT)  
FRONT SPEAKERS (RIGHT)  
CENTER SPEAKER  
White  
Red  
Green  
Blue  
SURROUND SPEAKERS (LEFT)  
SURROUND SPEAKERS (RIGHT) Gray  
Surround speakers  
TH-C60: SP-THC60S  
TH-C20: SP-THC20S  
Center speaker  
TH-C60: SP-THC60C  
TH-C20: SP-THC20C  
Precautions for daily use  
CAUTION  
• When moving the speakers, do not pull the speaker cords;  
otherwise, the speakers may fall over, causing damage or injury.  
• Do not reproduce sounds at so high a volume that the sound is  
distorted; otherwise, the speakers may be damaged by internal  
heat buildup.  
• If you connect speakers other than the supplied ones, use speakers of  
the same speaker impedance (SPEAKER IMPEDANCE) indicated  
near the speaker terminals on the rear of the powered subwoofer.  
• DO NOT connect more than one speaker to one speaker terminal.  
• When installing the satellite speakers on the wall;  
– Be sure to have them installed on the wall by qualified personnel.  
DO NOT install the satellite speakers on the wall by yourself to  
avoid unexpected damage from falling off the wall due to incorrect  
installation or weakness in wall structure.  
– Care must be taken in selecting a location for speaker installation  
on a wall. Injury to personnel or damage to equipment may result  
if the speakers installed interfere with daily activities.  
For TH-C60:  
• When holding a speaker, always grasp the lower portion.  
• Do not lean against the speakers, as the speakers could fall down  
or break, possibly causing an injury. Especially be careful that  
children do not lean against them.  
12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Do not connect the power cord until all other connections have been made.  
Connections  
Speaker layout  
To obtain the best possible sound from this system, you need to  
place all the speakers except the subwoofer at the same distance  
from the listening position.  
Connecting a TV  
You can get better picture quality in the order — Component  
video > S-video > Composite video.  
• Distortion of picture may occur when connecting to the TV via a  
VCR, or to a TV with a built-in VCR.  
You need to set “MONITOR TYPE” in the PICTURE menu  
correctly according to the aspect ratio of your TV. (See page 38.)  
Center speaker  
Front left  
speaker  
Front right  
speaker  
7 To connect a TV equipped with the component video input  
Powered  
subwoofer  
jacks  
If your TV supports progressive video input, you can enjoy a high  
quality picture by setting the progressive scan mode to active. (See  
page 20.)  
Center unit  
TV  
To component  
video input  
Surround left  
speaker  
Surround right  
speaker  
Component video cord (not supplied)  
If your speakers cannot be placed at the same distance from the  
listening position  
You can adjust the delay time of the speakers. See “Delay menu  
(DELAY)” on page 38.  
NOTE  
• If the component video input jacks of your TV are of the BNC type,  
use a plug adapter (not supplied) to convert the pin plugs to BNC  
plugs.  
• The component video signals can be output only when you select  
DVD or USB MEMORY as the source to play. (See page 19.)  
NOTE  
• Place the satellite speakers on a flat and level surface.  
• The front and center speakers are magnetically shielded to avoid color  
distortions on TVs. However, if not installed properly, they may cause  
color distortions. So, pay attention to the following when installing  
the speakers.  
– When placing the speakers near a TV set, turn off the TV’s main  
power switch or unplug it before installing the speakers. Then wait  
at least 30 minutes before turning on the TV’s main power switch  
again.  
7 To connect a TV equipped with the composite or S-video jacks  
Center unit  
Composite video cord (supplied)  
or  
Some TVs may still be affected even though you have followed the  
above. If this happens, move the speakers away from the TV.  
• The surround speakers are not magnetically shielded.  
If they are located nearby the TV or monitor, it will probably cause  
color distortion on the screen. To avoid this, do not place the speakers  
nearby the TV or monitor.  
S-video cord  
(not supplied)  
Align the 5 marks.  
To S-video input  
To composite  
video input  
• Be sure to place the powered subwoofer to the TV’s right. If you place  
the powered subwoofer to the TV’s left, keep sufficient distance  
between them to prevent the TV screen from appearing mottled.  
TV  
NOTE  
• Select the appropriate scan mode according to your TV. (See page 20.)  
13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Do not connect the power cord until all other connections have been made.  
Connections  
Connecting the powered  
subwoofer  
Connecting a cassette recorder  
(Only for TH-C90)  
You can enjoy playing tape and also recording tracks/files from this  
Powered  
system.  
System cord  
Center unit  
subwoofer  
(supplied)  
Center unit  
RCA pin plug cord  
(not supplied)  
Align the 5 marks.  
Align the 5 marks.  
RCA pin plug cord  
(not supplied)  
Connecting to an analog  
component  
To audio output  
To audio input  
You can enjoy the sound of an analog component.  
Center unit  
Cassette recorder  
NOTE  
• The surround mode takes effect for the signals output from the TAPE  
OUT jacks. When recording to a tape, set the surround mode to  
“OFF”. (See page 26.)  
S-video cord  
(not supplied)  
RCA pin plug  
cord  
or  
(not supplied)  
Composite video  
cord  
Connecting to a digital  
component  
(not supplied)  
1
2
3
You can enjoy the sound of a digital component.  
Center unit  
VCR (1 3 or 2 3)  
TV (3)  
Cassette recorder (3)  
1 To composite video output  
2 To S-video output  
3 To audio output  
To digital optical output  
DBS* tuner  
MD player  
NOTE  
Digital optical cord (not supplied)  
• The signals input to the VIDEO jack of the VCR IN jacks will be  
output only from the VIDEO jack of the VIDEO OUT jacks, not from  
the S-VIDEO jack of the VIDEO OUT jacks.  
* DBS = Direct Broadcasting Satellite  
NOTE  
• Only digital audio signals can be input when selecting “DBS” as the  
source to play. (See page 19.) When connecting a video component  
such as a DBS tuner, operate this system to listen to the sound.  
14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Do not connect the power cord until all other connections have been made.  
Connections  
Connecting a USB mass storage  
class device  
Connecting the power cord  
Make sure that all other connections have been completed.  
You can connect a USB mass storage class device such as a USB  
flash memory device, hard disc drive, multimedia card reader,  
digital camera, etc. to this system.  
Center unit  
• After connecting a USB mass storage class device to this system  
and selecting USB MEMORY as the source, the file control  
display appears on the TV screen. (See page 30.)  
USB cable (not supplied)  
Center unit (on the  
front panel)  
Power cord (supplied)  
Plug into AC outlet.  
NOTE  
• When connecting a USB mass storage class device, refer also to its  
manual.  
• Connect one USB mass storage class device to the system at a time. Do  
not use a USB hub.  
Powered subwoofer  
SP-PWC90  
Power cord  
Plug into AC outlet.  
• You cannot charge the USB mass storage class device while  
connecting it to the USB MEMORY jack.  
• While playing back a file in a USB mass storage class device, do not  
disconnect the device. It may cause a malfunction of both the system  
and the device.  
• JVC bears no responsibility for any loss of data in the USB mass  
storage class device while using this system.  
• When connecting with a USB cable, use a cable less than 1 m in  
length.  
• This system is compatible with the USB 2.0 Full-Speed (not  
compatible with the USB 1.1).  
SP-PWC60/SP-PWC20  
Power cord  
Plug into AC outlet.  
• You can play back the following types of files in a USB mass storage  
class device (maximum data transfer rate: 2 Mbps):  
– Music: MP3, WMA  
CAUTION  
• Disconnect the power cord before cleaning or moving the system.  
• Do not pull on the power cord to unplug the cord. When unplugging  
the cord, always grasp and pull the plug so as not to damage the cord.  
• If the AC outlets do not match the AC plugs, use the supplied AC plug  
adapter (except for the countries of the Middle East).  
– Picture: JPEG  
– Movie: MPEG-4 (ASF), DivX (maximum frame rate of 30 fps for  
progressive)  
• You cannot play back a file larger than 2 GB.  
• When playing a file which has a large transfer rate, frames or sounds  
may be dropped during playback.  
• This system cannot recognize a USB mass storage class device whose  
rating exceeds 5 V/500 mA.  
• This system may not recognize some USB mass storage class devices.  
• This system may not play back some files even though their formats  
are listed above.  
.
15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Operating external components with the remote control  
The buttons described below are used on pages 16 and 17.  
Operating the TV  
7 To set the manufacturer’s code  
1 Slide the remote control mode selector  
to TV.  
2 Press and hold F TV.  
Keep the button pressed until step 4 is finished.  
3 Press ENTER.  
Number  
buttons  
4 Press number buttons (1-9, 0) to enter  
the manufacturers code (2 digits).  
Examples:  
For a Hitachi TV: Press 1, then 0.  
For a Toshiba TV: Press 0, then 8.  
Remote  
control mode  
selector  
Manufacturer  
JVC  
Code Manufacturer  
Code  
12  
01*  
10  
Samsung  
Sanyo  
Sharp  
Hitachi  
13, 14  
06  
Magnavox  
Mitsubishi  
Panasonic  
Philips  
02  
03  
Sony  
07  
04, 11 Toshiba  
08  
15  
05  
Zenith  
09  
RCA  
* “01” is the initial setting.  
(play button)  
5 Release F TV.  
If there is more than one code listed for corresponding brand,  
try each one until you enter the correct one.  
NOTE  
7 Operation  
• Manufacturers’ codes are subject to change without notice.  
• Set the codes again after replacing the batteries of the remote control.  
Aim the remote control at the TV.  
IMPORTANT  
Before using the remote control to operate a TV;  
• Set the remote control mode selector to TV.  
The following buttons are available:  
F TV:  
Turns TV on and off.  
Adjusts the volume.  
Selects the input mode (either TV or  
VIDEO).  
Changes the channels.  
TV VOL +/–:  
TV/VIDEO:  
CH +/–:  
1-10, 0, h10 (100+): Selects the channel.  
TV RETURN:  
Alternates between the previously selected  
channel and the current channel.  
NOTE  
• The operating buttons may differ depending on manufacturers.  
16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
See page 16 for button locations.  
Operating external components with the remote control  
Operating the DBS tuner or  
CATV converter  
Operating the VCR  
7 To set the manufacturer’s code  
7 To set the manufacturer’s code  
1 Slide the remote control mode selector  
to VCR/DBS.  
1 Slide the remote control mode selector  
to VCR/DBS.  
2 Press VCR.  
2 Press DBS.  
3 Press and hold F VCR/DBS.  
Keep the button pressed until step 5 is finished.  
3 Press and hold F VCR/DBS.  
Keep the button pressed until step 5 is finished.  
4 Press ENTER.  
4 Press ENTER.  
5 Press number buttons (1-9, 0) to enter  
the manufacturers code (2 digits).  
Examples:  
5 Press number buttons (1-9, 0) to enter  
the manufacturers code (2 digits).  
Examples:  
For a Philips VCR: Press 0, then 9.  
For an NEC VCR: Press 2, then 5.  
For a GI Jerrold product: Press 0, then 1.  
For a Sony product: Press 2, then 0.  
Manufacturer  
JVC  
Code  
Manufacturer  
Philips  
Code  
09  
01*, 02, 03  
11, 26  
29  
Manufacturer  
Echostar  
GI Jerrold  
Hamlin  
Code  
Emerson  
Fisher  
RCA  
05, 06  
24  
21  
Samsung  
01*, 02, 03, 04, 05, 06, 07, 08  
Funai  
10, 14, 15, 16 Sanyo  
21, 22, 23  
27, 28  
30  
15, 16, 17, 18  
13, 14  
19  
Gold Star  
Hitachi  
12  
Sharp  
Pioneer  
04  
Shintom  
Sony  
RCA  
Mitsubishi  
NEC  
13  
18, 19, 20  
08  
Scientific Atlanta  
Sony  
09, 10  
20  
25  
Zenith  
Panasonic  
07, 17  
Zenith  
11, 12  
* “01” is the initial setting.  
* “01” is the initial setting.  
6 Release F VCR/DBS.  
6 Release F VCR/DBS.  
If there is more than one code listed for your brand, try each  
one until you enter the correct one.  
If there is more than one code listed for your brand, try each  
one until you enter the correct one.  
7 Operation  
7 Operation  
Aim the remote control at the VCR.  
Aim the remote control at the DBS tuner or CATV converter.  
IMPORTANT  
IMPORTANT  
Before using the remote control to operate a  
VCR;  
Before using the remote control to operate a  
DBS tuner or CATV converter;  
1
Set the remote control mode selector  
to VCR/DBS.  
1
Set the remote control mode selector  
to VCR/DBS.  
2
Press VCR.  
2
Press DBS.  
The following buttons are available:  
The following buttons are available:  
F VCR/DBS:  
Turns VCR on and off.  
F VCR/DBS:  
Turns DBS tuner or CATV converter on and  
3 (play button):  
Starts playback.  
off.  
7:  
8:  
Stops operation.  
CH +/–:  
Changes the channels.  
Pauses playback.  
Fast forwards video tape.  
Rewinds video tape.  
Press this button together with 3 (play  
button) to start recording or together with 8  
to pause recording.  
1-10, 0, h10 (100+): Selects the channel.  
y
:
1:  
REC:  
CH +/–:  
Changes the TV channels on the VCR.  
NOTE  
• When operating a VCR or DBS tuner/CATV converter;  
– The source setting of VCR or DBS remains after you have changed  
the remote control mode selector to AUDIO or TV. When operating  
VCR or DBS tuner/CATV converter again, it is not necessary to  
press VCR or DBS after setting the remote control mode selector.  
17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic operations  
The buttons on the remote control are used to explain most of the  
operations in this manual. You can use the buttons on the center  
unit same as on the remote control for operations unless  
otherwise noted.  
Turning the system on/off  
On the remote control:  
Press FAUDIO.  
On the center unit:  
IMPORTANT  
Before using the remote control for the following  
operation;  
Press F.  
When DVD or USB MEMORY is selected as the source (see page  
19), the following messages will appear on the TV screen.  
• Set the remote control mode selector to AUDIO.  
The buttons described below are used on pages 18 to 20.  
Source  
selecting  
buttons  
• “OPEN”/“CLOSE”:  
Appears when opening or closing the disc tray.  
• “NOW READING”:  
Appears when the system is reading the disc/file information.  
• “REGION CODE ERROR!”:  
Appears when the Region Code of the DVD VIDEO does not  
match the code the system supports. The disc cannot be  
played back.  
• “NO DISC”:  
Remote  
control mode  
selector  
Appears when no disc is loaded.  
• “NO USB DEVICE”:  
Appears when no USB mass storage class device is connected.  
• “CANNOT PLAY THIS DISC”:  
Appears when unplayable disc is loaded.  
• “CANNOT PLAY THIS DEVICE”:  
Appears when unplayable USB mass storage class device is  
connected.  
Cursor  
(3/2)/  
ENTER  
NOTE  
• The STANDBY lamp on the center unit lights red when the power is  
turned off. The lamp goes off when the power is turned on.  
• The power supply to the subwoofer is linked to the center unit. The  
POWER ON lamp on the subwoofer lights green when the power is  
turned on.  
• A small amount of power is consumed even when the power is turned  
off (center unit only). This is called standby mode and the STANDBY  
lamp lights in this mode. Unplug the power cord from the AC outlet  
to turn the power off completely.  
• You can also turn on the system by pressing the following buttons:  
– One of the DISC (1-5) buttons (with SHIFT pressed) on the remote  
control  
– One of the DISC (1-5) 0 buttons on the center unit  
– One of the source selecting buttons or 3 on the remote control  
– One of the DISC (1-5) 3 buttons or 3 on the center unit  
STANDBY lamp  
18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
See page 18 for button locations.  
Basic operations  
Selecting the source to play  
Listening with headphones  
(not supplied)  
On the remote control:  
Press one of the source selecting buttons  
(DVD, USB MEMORY, FM/AM, VCR, DBS or  
CAUTION  
Be sure to turn down the volume;  
• Before connecting or putting on headphones as high volume may  
damage both the headphones and your hearing.  
• Before disconnecting headphones as high volume may be suddenly  
output from the speakers.  
TAPE*).  
DVD:  
To play back a disc (DVD VIDEO, VCD etc.). (See page 21.)  
USB MEMORY:  
To play back a file in a USB mass storage class device. (See “To play  
a file in a USB mass storage class device” on page 21.)  
While connecting a pair of headphones to the PHONES jack on the  
center unit, the system automatically cancels the surround mode  
(see page 26) currently selected, deactivates the speakers, turns the  
subwoofer’s power off, and activates the headphone mode.  
“H. PHONE” appears on the display window.  
FM/AM:  
To tune in an FM or AM station. (See page 39.) Each time you press  
the button, the band alternates between FM and AM.  
VCR:  
Headphone mode  
When using the headphones, the following signals are output  
regardless of your speaker setting;  
To select the source from a component connected to the VCR IN  
jacks and AUX IN (VCR) jacks. (See page 14.)  
• For 2 channel sources, the front left and right channel signals are  
output from the headphones.  
• Multi-channel signals are down-mixed and output from the  
headphones.  
• (For DVD AUDIO) When the disc prohibits down-mixing, only  
the front left and right channels are output from the headphones.  
DBS:  
To select the source from a component connected to the DIGITAL  
IN (DBS) jack. (See page 14.)  
TAPE*:  
To select the source from a component connected to the TAPE IN  
jacks. (See page 14.)  
On the center unit:  
Turning off the sound  
temporarily [MUTING]  
Press MUTING.  
Press SOURCE repeatedly until the source  
name you want appears on the display  
window.  
NOTE  
To restore the sound  
Perform one of the following:  
• Press MUTING again.  
• When AM, FM, DBS or TAPE* is selected, this system does not  
output video signals.  
• It may take time to change the source.  
• Press VOL +/– (or turn VOLUME on the center unit).  
* Only for TH-C90  
Adjusting the brightness of the  
indications [DIMMER]  
Adjusting the volume  
[VOLUME]  
Press DIMMER.  
Each time you press the button, you can change the brightness level  
in 3 steps.  
CAUTION  
• Always set the volume to minimum level before starting any source.  
If the volume is set at a high level, the sudden blast of sound could  
permanently damage your hearing and/or blow out the speakers.  
On the remote control:  
Press VOL +/–.  
On the center unit:  
Turn VOLUME.  
To increase the volume, turn VOLUME clockwise.  
To decrease the volume, turn VOLUME counterclockwise.  
19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
See page 18 for button locations.  
Basic operations  
Sleep Timer [SLEEP]  
Adjusting the sound  
The system turns off automatically when the specified period of  
1 Press TREBLE/BASS to show “TRE” or  
time has passed.  
“BASS” on the display window.  
Press SLEEP.  
Each time you press the button, the indication alternates  
between “TRE” and “BASS.  
Each time you press the button, the shut-off time changes as  
follows:  
• TRE: Select this to adjust treble sound.  
• BASS: Select this to adjust bass sound.  
– – (off) Z 10 Z 20 Z 30 Z 60 Z 90 Z 120 Z 150 Z  
(back to the beginning)  
(Unit: min.)  
2 Press LEVEL +/– to adjust the level from  
Example:  
– 10 to +10 (in 2 steps).  
minutes  
NOTE  
• The adjustments take effect for all sources.  
Changing the scan mode  
The system can be accommodated to your TVs scan mode.  
To check the remaining time  
Press SLEEP once.  
To change the remaining time  
Press SLEEP repeatedly.  
NOTE  
• To use the system in the progressive mode, it is required that the  
center unit is connected to the TV by using a component video cord  
(not supplied). (See page 13.)  
To cancel  
Press SLEEP repeatedly until “SLEEP – –” appears.  
Turning off the power also cancels the Sleep Timer.  
7 While DVD or USB MEMORY is selected as the source and  
1 stPoprpeedss and hold SCAN MODE for  
Adjusting the output level of  
the subwoofer and speakers  
2 seconds.  
Currently selected scan mode appears on the display window.  
2 Press Cursor 3/2 to select the desired  
1 Press SPK LEVEL to show the target  
speaker indication on the display  
window.  
mode.  
NT. 480I: Select when your TV supports the NTSC  
interlaced video input only.  
NT. 480P: Select when your TV equipped with component  
jacks supports the NTSC progressive video input.  
PAL. 576I: Select when your TV supports the PAL interlaced  
video input only.  
Each time you press the button, the indication of the speakers  
changes as follows:  
FRNT L (Front Left speaker) Z FRNT R (Front Right  
speaker) Z CENTER (Center speaker) Z SURR L  
(Surround Left speaker) Z SURR R (Surround Right  
speaker) Z SUBWFR (Subwoofer) Z (back to the  
beginning)  
PAL. 576P: Select when your TV equipped with component  
jacks supports the PAL progressive video input.  
You can get better picture quality in the progressive mode  
(“NT. 480P” or “PAL. 576P”) than in the interlace mode  
(“NT. 480I” or “PAL. 576I”).  
2 Press LEVEL +/– to adjust the output  
level from –6 to +6.  
3 Press ENTER while the selected mode is  
NOTE  
displayed.  
When the progressive mode is selected, the PROGRESSIVE  
indicator lights on the display window.  
• You can also make adjustments by using the setup menu shown on  
the TV screen. (See page 38.)  
• The adjustments take effect for all sources other than FM/AM. For  
FM/AM, adjust the level separately by repeating the procedure above.  
NOTE  
• Changing the scan mode does not take effect when connecting the TV  
with the S-video or the composite video cord.  
• Although the picture may be distorted when you press ENTER, this is  
not a malfunction of the system.  
• There are some progressive TVs and High-Definition TVs that are  
not fully compatible with this system, resulting in an unnatural  
picture when playing back a DVD VIDEO in the progressive scan  
mode. In such a case, change the scan mode to the interlace mode.  
• All JVC progressive TVs and High-Definition TVs are fully  
compatible with this system.  
20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Playback  
• The icon such as  
shows the disc formats or file types the  
operation is available for.  
Basic playback  
IMPORTANT  
Before using the remote control for the  
following operation;  
7 To play a disc  
1 Press the desired DISC (1-5)  
1
Set the remote control mode selector  
0 on the center unit.  
to AUDIO.  
2
Press DVD or USB MEMORY.  
The system turns on and the disc tray comes  
out.  
The buttons described below are used on pages 21 to 25.  
2 Place a disc.  
Label side up  
When placing an 8 cm disc  
3 Press DISC (1-5), with SHIFT pressed.  
NOTE  
• Up to 5 discs can be loaded.  
Number  
buttons  
• You can also start playback by pressing the following buttons:  
DVD or 3 (play button) on the remote control  
DISC (1-5) 3 or 3 on the center unit  
Remote  
control mode  
selector  
• The system plays back available discs sequentially until you stop  
playback or until the disc loaded on the DISC 5 tray reaches to the  
end. However, when DVD VIDEO or DVD AUDIO is loaded in the  
system, playback of the disc next to the DVD VIDEO or DVD  
AUDIO will not start.  
Cursor  
(3/2/Y/5)/  
ENTER  
7 To play a file in a USB mass storage class device  
Press USB MEMORY.  
The operations of the files in a USB mass storage class device  
depend on the file types stored in the device.  
• For details on connecting a USB mass storage class device, see  
“Connecting a USB mass storage class device. (See page 15.)  
(play button)  
7 When playing the following files...  
For MP3/WMA files  
The file control display (see page 30) appears on the TV screen.  
For JPEG files  
Each file (still pictures) is shown on the TV screen for about 3  
seconds (slide-show). When stopping playback, the file control  
display (see page 30) appears on the TV screen.  
For ASF/MPEG-2/MPEG-1 files  
Pressing TOP MENU/PG or MENU/PL shows the file control  
display (see page 30) on the TV screen during playback.  
For DivX files  
During the readout time, “READING INDEX” may appear on  
the TV screen.  
Pressing TOP MENU/PG or MENU/PL shows the file control  
display (see page 30) on the TV screen during playback.  
NOTE  
• When several types of files are recorded on a disc/device, select  
appropriate file type on the setup menu. (See page 38.)  
• (For JPEG) The system cannot accept operations even though you  
press any buttons before the entire picture appears on the TV screen.  
7 To pause playback  
Press 8.  
To continue playback, press 3 (play button).  
7 To stop  
Press 7.  
21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
See page 21 for button locations.  
Playback  
VCD/SVCD/CD  
Example: When a CD is played back  
7 On-screen guide icons  
During DVD VIDEO playback, the following guide icons may  
appear for a while on the TV screen;  
Signal and speaker  
indicators  
Track number  
: appears at the beginning of a scene containing multi-subtitle  
languages.  
: appears at the beginning of a scene containing multi-audio  
languages.  
: appears at the beginning of a scene containing multi-angle  
views.  
(Play),  
fast-reverse),  
Elapsed playing time (hour:minute:second)  
(Pause),  
/
(Fast forward/  
/
(Slow-motion forward/  
NOTE  
reverse): appears when you perform each operation.  
• When a VCD or SVCD with PBC function is played, the elapsed  
playing time does not appear, but “PBC” appears.  
: the disc cannot accept an operation you have tried to do.  
NOTE  
MP3/WMA file  
Example: When an MP3 file is played back  
• If you do not want the on-screen guide icons to appear, see page 39.  
Signal and speaker  
7 Playback information on the display window  
indicators  
Track number  
DVD VIDEO  
Example: When a DVD VIDEO encoded with Dolby Digital 5.1 ch  
is played  
Elapsed playing time  
(hour:minute:second)  
MP3 indicator*  
Elapsed playing time (hour:minute:second)  
(during playback only)  
Chapter number  
Pressing FL DISPLAY  
Group number  
Signal and speaker indicators (See page 27.)  
Surround mode and digital signal format (See page 27.)  
Pressing FL DISPLAY  
Track number  
* WMA indicator lights for a WMA file.  
Title number  
Chapter number  
JPEG file  
Example: When slide-show is played back  
File number  
DVD AUDIO  
Signal and speaker indicators  
Pressing FL DISPLAY  
Track number  
Elapsed playing time  
(hour:minute:second)  
Group number  
File number  
Pressing FL DISPLAY  
Group number  
Track number  
Continued on the next page  
22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
See page 21 for button locations.  
Playback  
ASF/MPEG-2/MPEG-1/DivX file  
Example: When an ASF file is played  
7 Disc information on the display window  
The disc indicators on the display window show the current status  
of the corresponding disc tray.  
Track number  
Signal and speaker indicators  
Example: When the discs are loaded to disc trays 1, 2 and 5, and the  
disc in the disc tray 5 is selected.  
Currently selected disc  
number  
Elapsed playing time (hour:minute:second)  
(during playback only)  
Pressing FL DISPLAY  
Currently loaded disc number  
Group number  
Track number  
7 Screen saver  
An image may burn in on a TV screen if a static picture is displayed  
for a long time. To prevent this, the system automatically dims the  
screen if a static picture is displayed for over 5 minutes (the screen  
saver function).  
• Pressing any button will cancel the screen saver function.  
• If you do not want to use the screen saver function, see page 38.  
DVD VR disc  
Example: During playback on the Original program*  
Elapsed playing time  
Chapter number  
(hour:minute:second)  
One Touch Replay  
You can move back the playback position by 10 seconds  
from the current position.  
7 During playback  
Pressing FL DISPLAY  
Press  
.
Title number  
Chapter number  
NOTE  
• This function works in the same title.  
• This function is not available during the repeat playback.  
• This feature may not work for some discs.  
Example: During playback on the Playlist*  
Fast-forward/fast-reverse  
search  
Elapsed playing time  
(hour:minute:second)  
Chapter number  
7 During playback  
On the remote control:  
Press y or 1.  
Each time you press the button, the search  
speed changes (x2, x5, x10, x20, x60).  
Pressing FL DISPLAY  
To return to normal speed playback  
Press 3 (play button).  
Playlist number  
Chapter number  
On the center unit:  
Press and hold x or 4.  
Continuously pressing x or 4 increases the fast-forward/  
reverse search speed (x5, x20).  
* Pressing TOP MENU/PG or MENU/PL, you can change the play  
mode. (See page 25.)  
NOTE  
NOTE  
• When a DVD VIDEO, DVD VR, VCD, SVCD, or ASF/MPEG-2/  
MPEG-1/DivX is played back, no sound comes out during fast-  
forward/reverse search.  
• You can change the time information mode (except for MP3/WMA/  
ASF/MPEG-2/MPEG-1/DivX). (See page 28.)  
• You can also check the playback information on the TV screen. (See  
page 27.)  
• When a DVD AUDIO, CD, or MP3/WMA is played back, sound is  
intermittent and low during fast-forward/reverse search.  
• This feature may not work for some discs/files.  
• For MP3/WMA, the search speed is not shown.  
• The search speed for DivX is y 1, y 2, y 3 for forward search,  
and 11, 12 and 13 for reverse search.  
23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
See page 21 for button locations.  
Playback  
Skip to the beginning of a  
desired selection  
Skipping at about 5-minute  
intervals  
You can skip within the file at about 5-minute intervals.  
This is useful especially when you want to skip within a  
long file.  
7 Using x/4 buttons  
7 For DVD VIDEO/DVD VR (chapter): During  
7 During playback  
playback  
7 For VCD/SVCD (track): During playback  
without PBC function  
Press Cursor 3/2.  
Each time you press the button, the playback position skips to the  
beginning of the previous or next interval. Each interval is about  
5 minutes.  
7 For DVD AUDIO/CD/MP3/WMA/JPEG/  
ASF/MPEG-2/MPEG-1/DivX (track/file): During playback or  
while stopped  
Press x or 4 repeatedly.  
NOTE  
NOTE  
• Intervals are automatically assigned from the beginning of a file.  
• This feature is available only within the same file.  
• This feature may not work for some discs/files.  
• When playing back an MP3/WMA/JPEG/ASF/MPEG-2/MPEG-1/  
DivX file, you can make operations using the file control display. (See  
page 30.)  
• This feature may not work for some discs/files.  
Locating a desired title/group  
using number buttons  
7 Using number buttons on the remote control  
7 For DVD VIDEO/DVD VR (title, chapter):  
While stopped, the title number is selected.  
During playback, the chapter number is selected.  
7 For DVD AUDIO (track):  
7 During playback or while stopped  
1 Press TITLE/GROUP.  
“– –” is shown in the title/group display area  
in the display window.  
During playback or while stopped  
7 For VCD/SVCD (track):  
Example: During DVD VIDEO playback  
During playback or while stopped without PBC function  
7 For CD/MP3/WMA/JPEG/ASF/MPEG-2/MPEG-1/DivX  
(track/file):  
During playback or while stopped  
Press number buttons (0-10, h10) to  
2 While the display window shows “– –,  
use number buttons (0-10, h10) to  
enter the desired title or group  
select the desired number.  
• For details on using the number buttons, see “How to use the  
number buttons” below.  
number.  
How to use the number buttons  
The system starts playback from the first chapter/track/file of  
the selected title/group.  
• For details on using the number buttons, see “How to use the  
number buttons” on the left column.  
To select 3:  
Press 3.  
To select 10: Press 10.  
To select 14: Press h10, 1, then 4.  
To select 24: Press h10, 2, then 4.  
To select 40: Press h10, 4, then 0.  
To select 114: Press h10, h10, 1, 1, then 4.  
NOTE  
• When locating a title of a DVD VR disc, the PG or PL indicator may  
light on the display window.  
• This feature may not work for some discs/files.  
24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
See page 21 for button locations.  
Playback  
Playing back a bonus group  
Selecting the desired title/  
playlist from the control  
display  
Some DVD AUDIOs have a special group called “bonus  
group” whose contents are not open to the public. The  
bonus group is always assigned to the last group of a disc. To  
play back a bonus group, you have to enter the specific “key  
number” (a password). The way of getting the key number depends  
on the disc. After getting the key number, you can play back the  
bonus group by following the procedure below.  
7 During playback or while stopped  
DVD  
VR  
1 Press TOP MENU/PG or MENU/PL.  
The control display is shown on the TV screen, and the system  
starts playback of the first title/playlist.  
7 While the BONUS indicator lights up on the display window  
• The PLAY LIST is shown only when the playlist is on the  
DVD VR disc.  
1 Select the bonus group.  
For selecting the group, see “Locating a desired title/group  
using number buttons” described on page 24.  
The key number entry indication appears.  
TOP MENU/PG: shows the ORIGINAL PROGRAM.  
Example:  
On the TV  
On the display window  
*1: Title number  
2 Press number buttons (0-9) to enter the  
*2: Recording date  
key number, then press ENTER.  
When you enter the correct key number, playback starts and  
the BONUS indicator goes off.  
*3: Recording source (TV station, the input terminal of the  
recording equipment etc.)  
*4: Start time of recording  
*5: Title of the original program/playlist (The title may not be  
displayed depending on the recording equipment.)  
*6: Current title  
• If you enter a wrong number, reenter the correct number.  
To clear the key number entry  
Perform whichever one of the following:  
• Press 7.  
MENU/PL: shows the PLAY LIST.  
Example:  
• Open the disc tray.  
Turn off the system.  
NOTE  
• In Random Playback, tracks in the bonus group are not played back.  
*7: Playlist number  
*8: Creating date of playlists  
*9: Number of chapters  
*10: Total playing time  
*11: Current playlist  
2 Press Cursor Y/5 to select the desired  
title/playlist.  
The system starts playback of the selected title/playlist.  
To clear the control display  
Press ENTER.  
About the play mode on a DVD VR disc  
• Original program (ORIGINAL PROGRAM):  
The system can play back the original picture in the recorded  
order.  
• Playlist (PLAY LIST):  
The system can play back the playlist edited by the recording  
equipment.  
25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Advanced operations  
• The icon such as  
shows the disc formats or file types the  
operation is available for.  
Using the surround mode  
IMPORTANT  
Before using the remote control for the following  
operation;  
You can enjoy more realistic sound field than a stereo sound by  
using the surround mode.  
• Set the remote control mode selector to AUDIO.  
• There are exceptions in the operation mentioned  
above. In such a case, follow each instruction.  
7 Auto Surround (AUTO SUR)  
Used to reproduce the sound as it is recorded without any  
conversion (downmixing or simulation, etc.). For example, a  
multichannel source is automatically reproduced in multichannel  
audio.  
The buttons described below are used on pages 26 to 36.  
7 Dolby Surround  
Dolby Pro Logic II*  
1
Dolby Pro Logic II has a newly developed multichannel playback  
format to decode all 2 channel sources — stereo source and Dolby  
Surround encoded source — into a 5.1 channel.  
Dolby Pro Logic II has two modes — Movie mode and Music mode:  
• Pro Logic II Movie (MOVIE)  
Suitable for reproduction of Dolby Surround encoded sources  
Number  
buttons  
Remote  
controlmode  
selector  
bearing the mark  
• Pro Logic II Music (MUSIC)  
.
Suitable for reproduction of any 2 channel stereo music sources.  
1
Dolby Digital*  
Used to reproduce multichannel soundtracks of the software  
Cursor  
(3/2/Y/5)/  
ENTER  
encoded with Dolby Digital (  
).  
• There are other encoding formats of digital surround introduced  
by Dolby Laboratories, such as Dolby Digital EX.  
(play button)  
2
7 DTS Digital Surround*  
Used to reproduce multichannel soundtracks of the software  
encoded with DTS Digital Surround (  
).  
DTS Digital Surround (DTS) is another discrete multichannel  
digital audio format available on CD and DVD software.  
• There are other encoding formats of multi-channel digital  
surround introduced by Digital Theater Systems, Inc., such as  
DTS-ES, DTS 96/24.  
Available Surround modes for each input signal  
The marks show available surround modes.  
Mode Surround  
off  
Auto  
DTS Digital Linear Packed  
Dolby Surround  
DSP  
Surround  
Surround  
DTS  
PCM  
PCM  
3
3
3
3
Signal  
OFF  
AUTO SUR MOVIE* MUSIC* DOLBY D  
LPCM PPCM STADIUM* ALL ST*  
Dolby D  
(Multichannel)  
Dolby D  
(2 channel)  
DTS Digital Surround  
(Multichannel)  
DTS Digital Surround  
(2 channel)  
Linear/Packed PCM  
(Multichannel)  
Analog (VCR) or Linear/  
Packed PCM (2 channel)  
1
*
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. “Dolby, Pro Logic, MLP Lossless, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of  
Dolby Laboratories.  
“DTS” and “DTS Digital Surround” are registered trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc.  
You can select these modes by pressing SURROUND. (See page 27.)  
2
3
*
*
Continued on the next page  
26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
See page 26 for button locations.  
Advanced operations  
7 DSP  
7 When playing back digital multichannel software (except  
• STADIUM  
while OFF is selected)  
STADIUM mode adds clarity and spreads the sound, like in an  
outdoor stadium.  
• All Channel Stereo  
The appropriate multichannel surround mode (Dolby Digital, DTS  
Digital Surround or Linear/Packed PCM) is automatically selected.  
All Channel Stereo (ALL ST) mode can reproduce a larger stereo  
sound field using all the connected (and activated) speakers.  
All Channel Stereo can be used while reproducing 2 channel stereo  
source.  
7 When playing back a 2 channel source  
You can select either Dolby Pro Logic II (MOVIE/MUSIC) or the  
DSP mode.  
Press SURROUND repeatedly to select the  
Normal stereo sound  
All Channel Stereo  
desired mode.  
The surround mode is turned on and the current surround mode  
appears on the display window.  
Each time you press the button, the surround mode changes.  
For details on each mode, see Available Surround modes for each  
input signal”. (See page 26.)  
To turn off the surround mode  
7 Indicators on the display window  
Digital signal format indicators  
Press SURROUND repeatedly until “OFF”  
appears on the display window.  
PPCM:  
Lights when DVD AUDIO packed PCM signals  
comes in.  
Storing adjustments — auto memory  
When you turn the power off, the system memorizes the current  
surround mode. The memorized mode is automatically recalled  
when you turn the power on.  
LPCM:  
GD:  
C:  
Lights when Linear PCM signal comes in.  
Lights when Dolby Digital signals come in.  
Lights when DTS Digital (Surround) signals come  
in.  
NOTE  
No indication: No digital signal indicator lights when analog  
signals come in.  
• For a down-mixing prohibited DVD AUDIO disc, the system  
continues to output multi-channel signals with “MULTI CH” shown  
on the display window even if the surround mode is turned off during  
playback. On the other hand, the system outputs only the front left  
and right channel signals with “LR ONLY” shown on the display  
window when you start playback with the surround mode having  
been set to “OFF” or “H. PHONE”.  
Dolby Surround mode indicator  
GPLII:  
Lights when Dolby Pro Logic II mode is activated.  
Surround indicator  
SURR:  
Lights when the surround mode is activated.  
• For ASF, MPEG-2, MPEG-1 and DivX (except DivX version 6), the  
surround mode takes no effects.  
Source signal indicators, etc.  
Light to indicate the incoming signals.  
a: Lights when the left channel signal comes  
in.  
Using the on-screen bar  
You can check disc information and you can use some functions  
using the on-screen bar.  
b: Lights when the center channel signal comes in.  
c: Lights when the right channel signal comes in.  
d: Lights when the LFE channel signal comes in.  
g: Lights when the surround left channel signal comes in.  
i: Lights when the surround right channel signal comes in.  
h: Lights when the monaural surround channel signal or 2  
channel Dolby Surround signal comes in.  
SW (Subwoofer): Always lights.  
Showing the on-screen bar  
7 Whenever a disc is loaded  
Press ON SCREEN.  
Each time you press the button, the on-screen bar  
changes as follows on the TV screen.  
The channel with “ ” shows that the corresponding speakers are  
reproducing the channels’ sound.  
If the channels’ sound decoded into 5.1 channel is reproduced, only  
Example: During DVD VIDEO playback  
” lights.  
Selecting the surround mode  
The system is set up to automatically select the optimal surround  
mode for input signal from digital multichannel software.  
When playing back a 2 channel source, you can select the desired  
surround mode manually.  
OFF  
(The on-screen bar disappears)  
IMPORTANT  
Before using the remote control for the following  
operation;  
(back to the beginning)  
• Set the remote control mode selector to AUDIO.  
• The currently selected item shows green.  
27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
See page 26 for button locations.  
Advanced operations  
7 Shows playback status.  
: appears during playback.  
7 Contents of the on-screen bar during playback  
DVD VIDEO  
/
/
: appears during fast forward/reverse.  
: appears during playback in forward slow-motion/  
reverse slow-motion.  
: appears when paused.  
: appears when stopped.  
8 Select this to change time information (F). See “Changing the  
time information” below.  
DVD AUDIO  
9 Select this for Repeat Playback. (See page 35.)  
0 Select this for time search function. (See page 30.)  
K For DVD VIDEO and DVD VR: Select this for chapter search  
function. (See page 29.)  
For DVD AUDIO: Select this for track search function. (See page  
29.)  
L Select this to change audio language or channel. (See page 32.)  
M Select this to change subtitle language and subpicture. (See page  
31.)  
VCD  
N Select this to change view angle. (See page 31.)  
O Select this to change the page. (See page 33.)  
P Shows Playback mode status.  
PROGRAM: appears during Program Playback. (See page 34.)  
RANDOM: appears during Random Playback. (See page 35.)  
Q Shows Repeat mode status. (See page 35.)  
SVCD  
Changing the time information  
You can change the time information in the on-  
screen bar on the TV screen and the display  
window of the center unit.  
CD  
7 During playback  
1 Press ON SCREEN twice.  
The on-screen bar appears on the TV screen.  
2 Press Cursor 3/2 to highlight  
.
DVD VR disc  
3 Press ENTER repeatedly to select the  
desired information.  
Example: When elapsed playing time of disc is selected.  
ASF/MPEG-2/MPEG-1/DivX  
7 DVD VIDEO/DVD AUDIO/DVD VR  
• TIME: Elapsed playing time of current chapter/track  
• REM: Remaining time of current chapter/track  
• TOTAL: Elapsed time of Title/Group/Program  
T. REM: Remaining time of Title/Group/Program  
1 Shows disc type.  
7 VCD/SVCD/CD  
2 Shows audio information.  
• TIME: Elapsed playing time of current track  
• REM: Remaining time of current track  
• TOTAL: Elapsed time of disc  
3 Shows disc number.  
4 For DVD VIDEO: Shows current title number.  
For DVD AUDIO: Shows current group number.  
For DVD VR: Shows current play mode (PG: for Original  
program, PL: for Playlist) and title number.  
5 For DVD VIDEO and DVD VR: Shows current chapter number.  
For other type of discs: Shows current track number.  
6 Shows time information. See “Changing the time information”  
on the right column.  
T. REM: Remaining time of disc  
4 Press ON SCREEN.  
The on-screen bar disappears.  
NOTE  
• When playing back DVD VR, “TIME” and “REM” cannot be shown.  
28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
See page 26 for button locations.  
Advanced operations  
Locating a desired chapter/track using the on-  
screen bar  
Playing from a specified  
position on a disc  
You can start playing a title, chapter or track you specify. You can  
also play a disc from specified time.  
7 During playback  
1 Press ON SCREEN twice.  
The on-screen bar appears on the TV screen.  
Locating a desired scene from the DVD menu  
2 Press Cursor 3/2 to highlight  
/
.
DVD VIDEOs and DVD AUDIOs generally have their  
own menus which show disc contents and you can  
display them on the TV screen. You can locate a desired  
scene by using these menus.  
3 Press ENTER.  
Example: During DVD VIDEO playback  
7 Whenever a DVD VIDEO or DVD AUDIO is loaded  
1 Press TOP MENU/PG or MENU/PL.  
The menu appears on the TV screen.  
4 Press number buttons (0-9) to enter the  
desired chapter number.  
Example:  
Normally, a DVD VIDEO or DVD AUDIO which contains  
more than one title will have a “top” menu which lists the titles.  
Press TOP MENU/PG to show the title menu.  
Some discs may also have a different menu which is shown by  
pressing MENU/PL.  
See the instructions for each discs regarding its particular  
menu.  
To select 8:  
Press 8.  
To select 10: Press 1, then 0.  
To select 20: Press 2, then 0.  
To select 37: Press 3, then 7.  
To correct a misentry  
Repeat step 4.  
2 Use Cursor 3/2/Y/5 to select a  
desired item.  
5 Press ENTER.  
3 Press ENTER.  
• With some discs, you can also select items by entering the  
corresponding number using number buttons.  
6 Press ON SCREEN.  
The on-screen bar disappears.  
NOTE  
• You can select up to the 99th chapter/track.  
NOTE  
• This feature may not work for some discs.  
Locating a desired scene using a VCD/SVCD menu  
with PBC  
A VCD or SVCD recorded with PBC has its own menus  
such as a list of contained songs. You can locate a  
specific scene by using these menus.  
7 During playback with PBC function  
1 Press RETURN repeatedly until the  
menu appears on the TV screen.  
2 Press number buttons (1-10, h10) to  
select the number of the desired item.  
• For details on using the number buttons, see “How to use the  
number buttons. (See page 24.)  
To return to the menu  
Press RETURN repeatedly until the menu screen appears.  
When “NEXT” or “PREVIOUS” is shown on the TV screen:  
To go to the next page, press x.  
To return to the previous page, press 4.  
NOTE  
• If you want to play a PBC-compatible VCD/SVCD without using the  
PBC function, perform any of the following:  
– Start playback by pressing number buttons while stopped.  
– Press x repeatedly until the desired track number is displayed,  
then start playback by pressing 3 (play button). The track number  
appears on the display window instead of “PBC”.  
• To activate the PBC function when playing a PBC-compatible VCD/  
SVCD without using the PBC function, perform any of the following:  
– Press TOP MENU/PG or MENU/PL.  
– Press 7 twice to stop playback, then press 3 (play button).  
29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
See page 26 for button locations.  
Advanced operations  
Locating a desired position by specifying the time  
Using the file control display  
You can search and play desired groups and tracks/  
files using the file control display on the TV  
screen.  
7 For DVD VIDEO/DVD AUDIO/DVD VR:  
During playback  
7 For VCD/SVCD: While stopped or during  
playback without PBC function  
7 For CD: During playback or while stopped  
Example: When the source is DVD.  
1
Current group/total group  
number  
Playback mode* (PROGRAM,  
RANDOM, REPEAT)  
7 When specifying the elapsed playing time from the  
beginning of the disc  
Perform the following procedure while stopped.  
Track information (for MP3/  
WMA only)  
Elapsed playing time of current  
track (except for JPEG)  
7 When specifying the elapsed playing time from the  
beginning of the current title/track  
Perform the following procedure during playback.  
2
*
1 Press ON SCREEN twice.  
The on-screen bar appears on the TV screen.  
2 Press Cursor 3/2 to highlight  
3 Press ENTER.  
.
4 Use number buttons (0-9) to enter the  
time.  
Example: To play back from a point 2 (hours): 34 (minutes): 08  
Current group  
Current track (file)  
(seconds) elapsed  
Current track (file) / total track (file)  
number on current group  
Total track (file)  
number on disc  
Press 2  
Press 4  
Press 8  
Press 3  
Press 0  
Playback status  
1
2
*
(For JPEG/ASF/MPEG-2/MPEG-1/DivX) The Program and  
Random mode are not available.  
When the source is USB MEMORY, USB” appears.  
*
To cancel a misentry  
The file control display appears automatically during playback  
(MP3/WMA) or while stopped.  
Press Cursor 2 repeatedly.  
5 Press ENTER.  
7 For MP3/WMA: During playback or while stopped  
7 For JPEG/ASF/MPEG-2/MPEG-1/DivX: While stopped  
6 Press ON SCREEN.  
The on-screen bar disappears.  
1 Press Cursor 3/2/Y/5 to select the  
desired group/track/file.  
2 Press 3 (play button) or ENTER.  
• Track playback/slide-show starts from the selected track/file.  
• When you press ENTER for JPEG, only the selected file is  
played back.  
NOTE  
• (For MP3/WMA) During playback, you can change the playback  
track/file by pressing x/4 or Cursor 5/Y.  
• You can also check playback information on the display window. (See  
page 22.)  
• Some group, track and file names may not be displayed correctly  
depending on recording conditions.  
• The order of groups, tracks, and files may be displayed differently  
from the order displayed on your personal computer.  
30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
See page 26 for button locations.  
Advanced operations  
NOTE  
Resume Playback  
• During DVD AUDIO playback, this feature is available only for the  
video part.  
When Resume Playback is set to “ON” (see page  
39) and you stop playback by the following  
operations, the position where playback has been  
stopped is stored. (The RESUME indicator lights  
on the display window.)  
Selecting the subtitle  
7 During playback of a disc/file containing  
Turning off the power (See page 18.)  
• Pressing 7 once  
subtitles in several languages  
• Changing the source (See page 19.)  
When using the SUBTITLE button:  
To start playback from the stored position  
Press 3 (play button) or corresponding source button (DVD or USB  
MEMORY).  
• There may be a case when 3 (play button) does not work after  
changing the source. In this case, select DVD or USB MEMORY  
as a source.  
1 Press SUBTITLE.  
Example (DVD VIDEO): “ENGLISH” is selected out of 3  
subtitle languages recorded.  
• Pressing DISC (1-5) (with SHIFT pressed) on the remote control or  
DISC (1-5) 3 on the center unit also resumes disc playback.  
To clear the stored position  
Press 7 again.  
2 Press Cursor Y/5 to select the desired  
subtitle.  
• Opening the disc tray with the playback disc or disconnecting the  
USB mass storage class device also clears the stored position.  
For DVD VR  
• Pressing SUBTITLE activates the subtitles (subpictures)  
regardless of whether the subtitles are recorded or not.  
(Subpictures will not change if no subpicture is recorded.)  
NOTE  
• (For DivX) The beginning of a scene where playback has been  
stopped may be stored.  
For SVCD  
• An SVCD can contain up to four subtitles. Pressing SUBTITLE  
changes the subtitles regardless of whether the subtitles are  
recorded or not. (Subtitles will not change if no subtitle is  
recorded.)  
Selecting a view angle  
7 During playback of a disc containing multi-view  
angles  
When using the on-screen bar:  
1 Press ON SCREEN twice.  
When using the ANGLE button:  
The on-screen bar appears on the TV screen.  
1 Press ANGLE with SHIFT pressed.  
2 Press Cursor 3/2 to highlight  
3 Press ENTER.  
.
Example: The first view angle is selected out of 3 view angles  
recorded.  
4 Press Cursor Y/5 repeatedly to select  
2 Press ANGLE repeatedly with SHIFT  
pressed, or press Cursor Y/5 to select  
the desired view angle.  
the desired subtitle.  
5 Press ENTER.  
When using the on-screen bar:  
6 Press ON SCREEN.  
The on-screen bar disappears.  
1 Press ON SCREEN twice.  
The on-screen bar appears on the TV screen.  
NOTE  
• To clear the subtitle, press SUBTITLE. Each time you press SUBTITLE,  
subtitle appears and disappears alternately.  
2 Press Cursor 3/2 to highlight  
3 Press ENTER.  
.
• Some subtitle or audio languages are abbreviated in the pop-up  
window. See “The language codes list”. (See page 37.)  
• During DVD AUDIO playback, this feature is available only for the  
video part.  
• For DivX, you cannot operate this procedure using the on-screen bar.  
4 Press Cursor Y/5 to select the desired  
view angle.  
5 Press ENTER.  
6 Press ON SCREEN.  
The on-screen bar disappears.  
31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
See page 26 for button locations.  
Advanced operations  
Selecting the audio  
Special picture playback  
7 During playback of a disc/file containing audio  
Frame-by-frame playback  
in several languages  
7 During playback  
When using the AUDIO button:  
Press 8 repeatedly.  
Each time you press the button, the still  
picture advances by one frame.  
1 Press AUDIO.  
Example (DVD VIDEO): “ENGLISH” is selected out of 3 audio  
languages recorded.  
To return to normal playback  
Press 3 (play button).  
Playing back in slow-motion  
7 During playback  
2 Press AUDIO repeatedly or press Cursor  
Y/5 to select the desired audio.  
1 Press 8 at the point where  
you want to start playback  
When using the on-screen bar:  
in slow-motion from.  
1 Press ON SCREEN twice.  
The system pauses playback.  
The on-screen bar appears on the TV screen.  
2 Press SLOW 9.  
2 Press Cursor 3/2 to highlight  
3 Press ENTER.  
.
Playback in forward slow-motion starts.  
For DVD VIDEO/DVD AUDIO only:  
To play back in reverse slow-motion, press SLOW (.  
Each time you press the button, the playback speed becomes  
faster (1/32, 1/16, 1/8, 1/4, 1/2).  
Example: On the TV  
4 Press Cursor Y/5 to select the desired  
audio.  
5 Press ENTER.  
To return to normal playback  
Press 3 (play button).  
6 Press ON SCREEN.  
The on-screen bar disappears.  
NOTE  
• Sound cannot be heard during slow-motion playback.  
• During DVD AUDIO playback, this feature is available only for the  
video part.  
NOTE  
• Some subtitle or audio languages are abbreviated in the pop-up  
window. See “The language codes list”. (See page 37.)  
• “ST”, “L”, or “R” is displayed when playing a VCD respectively  
representing “stereo”, “left sound” and “right sound”.  
When playing a SVCD, “ST1”, “ST2”, “L1”, “R1”, “L2”, or “R2” is  
displayed.  
• For DivX, you cannot operate this procedure using the on-screen bar.  
32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
See page 26 for button locations.  
Advanced operations  
Selecting browsable still picture recorded on DVD  
AUDIO  
Most DVD AUDIOs include browsable still pictures (B.S.P.),  
which usually appear by turns automatically during  
playback according to the playback sequence. You can  
change the picture (turn the page) manually when the current  
group/track has selectable pictures (pages).  
Changing the VFP setting  
The VFP (Video Fine Processor) function enables  
you to adjust the picture character according to the  
type of programming, picture tone or personal  
preference.  
7 During playback  
1 Press VFP.  
7 During playback and while the B.S.P. indicator lights up on the  
The current VFP settings appear on the TV screen.  
display window  
Example:  
When using the PAGE button:  
Press PAGE repeatedly to select a desired  
still picture.  
When using the on-screen bar:  
1 Press ON SCREEN twice.  
The on-screen bar appears on the TV screen.  
2 Press Cursor 3/2 to highlight  
3 Press ENTER.  
.
2 Press Cursor 3/2 repeatedly to select  
the VFP mode.  
• NORMAL: Normally select this.  
• CINEMA: Suitable for movies.  
When you select “NORMALor “CINEMA, press VFP to  
complete the setting.  
• USER 1 and USER 2: You can adjust parameters that affect  
picture appearance.  
4 Press Cursor 5/Y to select the desired  
still picture.  
Only when selecting “USER 1” or “USER 2” in step 2, proceed  
to perform the following operation;  
5 Press ENTER.  
3 Press Cursor Y/5 repeatedly to select  
6 Press ON SCREEN.  
The on-screen bar disappears.  
a parameter you want to adjust.  
Adjust gradually and confirm picture appearance results are as  
preferred.  
Zooming in  
• GAMMA: Controls brightness of neutral tints while  
maintaining brightness of dark and bright portions (–3 to  
+3).  
7 During playback or while paused  
1 Press ZOOM with SHIFT  
pressed.  
• BRIGHTNESS: Controls screen brightness (–8 to +8).  
• CONTRAST: Controls screen contrast (–7 to +7).  
• SATURATION: Controls screen color depth (–7 to +7).  
• TINT: Controls screen tint (–7 to +7).  
Each time you press ZOOM with SHIFT  
pressed, scene magnification changes.  
• SHARPNESS: Controls screen sharpness (–8 to +8).  
2 While zoomed in, press Cursor 3/2/  
4 Press ENTER.  
Y/5 to move zoom-in area.  
Example:  
To return to normal playback  
Press ZOOM repeatedly with SHIFT pressed, to select ZOOM OFF.  
NOTE  
• The number of the magnification steps varies depending on the disc  
type.  
• During slide-show playback of JPEG, zooming in is not available. In  
such a case, press 8 to pause slide-show playback, then zoom in.  
• During DVD AUDIO playback, this feature is available only for the  
video part.  
5 Press Cursor Y/5 to change the  
setting.  
6 Press ENTER.  
The current VFP settings appear again.  
7 Repeat steps 3 to 6 to adjust other  
• During playback, there may be a case where Cursor (3/2/Y/5)  
does not work in step 2 above.  
parameters.  
8 Press VFP.  
NOTE  
• Although the setting display disappears in the middle of the  
procedure, the setting at that time will be stored.  
33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
See page 26 for button locations.  
Advanced operations  
3 Press 3 (play button).  
Program Playback  
7 While stopped  
If all of the programmed tracks/files have been played back,  
playback stops and the program window appears again. Note  
that program setting remains.  
1 Press PLAY MODE  
To check the program contents  
During playback, press 7. Playback stops and the program window  
repeatedly until program  
appears.  
window appears on the TV screen.  
To quit the Program mode  
The PRG indicator lights on the display window.  
While stopped, press PLAY MODE repeatedly until both program  
window and  
disappear from the TV screen.  
NOTE  
• When the source is USB MEMORY, Program Playback does not  
work.  
• There may be a case where bonus group on a DVD AUDIO cannot be  
played.  
• The Resume function cannot be used with Program Playback.  
DISC (1-5) on the remote control and DISC (1-5) 3 on the center unit  
do not work during Program Playback.  
• Program Playback may not work for some discs.  
2 Follow the instructions that appear on  
the TV screen to program the desired  
chapters/tracks.  
• For details on using the number buttons, see “How to use the  
number buttons. (See page 24.)  
• The contents numbers that you have to specify for  
programming varies depending on the disc/file type:  
– DVD VIDEO: Titles and chapters  
– VCD, SVCD, CD: Tracks  
– DVD AUDIO, MP3, WMA: Groups and tracks  
• Before you program the tracks in bonus group on a DVD  
AUDIO, perform the procedure of “Playing back a bonus  
group” (see page 25) to turn off the BONUS indicator on the  
display window.  
You can specify the chapters/tracks whose number is up to  
99.  
• There may be a case that the group or title number can be  
entered even for discs that contain no groups or titles. In such  
a case, press ENTER to proceed to the Track/Chapter column.  
• When you press ENTER instead of the number buttons in the  
Track/Chapter column, ALLappears and all the tracks or  
chapters on the selected group or title are programmed as a  
step.  
To clear the programs one by one from the last entered  
number  
Press CANCEL repeatedly.  
To clear all programs  
Press and hold CANCEL.  
You can also clear the program by turning off the system.  
34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
See page 26 for button locations.  
Advanced operations  
Display  
window  
TV screen  
Meanings  
Random Playback  
Repeats the current group for  
DVD AUDIO/MP3/WMA/  
JPEG/ASF/MPEG-2/MPEG-1/  
DivX.  
You can play titles or tracks on a disc in random  
order.  
REPEAT GROUP  
7 While stopped  
1 Press PLAY MODE repeatedly until  
Repeats the current title for  
DVD VIDEO.  
appears on the TV screen.  
(For DVD VR) Repeats the  
current title for Original  
program.  
The RND indicator lights on the display window.  
2 Press 3 (play button).  
• When more than one discs are loaded, the system starts  
Random Playback of the next disc after completing current  
disc playback.  
(For DVD VR) Repeats the  
current playlist for Playlist.  
Repeats all titles and tracks on  
the current disc for DVD VR/  
VCD/SVCD/CD/MP3/WMA/  
JPEG/ASF/MPEG-2/MPEG-1/  
DivX.  
To quit Random mode  
While stopped, press PLAY MODE repeatedly until both program  
REPEAT DISC  
DISC  
ALL  
window and  
disappear from the TV screen.  
You can also clear the Random mode by turning off the system.  
NOTE  
Repeats all the available discs/  
files.  
• When the source is USB MEMORY, Random Playback does not  
work.  
REPEAT ALL  
• The same title/track will not be played back more than once during  
Random Playback.  
,
Repeats the current track for  
DVD AUDIO/VCD/SVCD/  
CD/MP3/WMA/ASF/MPEG-  
2/MPEG-1/DivX.  
REPEAT TRACK,  
REPEAT STEP  
1
Repeat Playback  
Repeats the current chapter for  
DVD VIDEO/DVD VR.  
,
Repeating the current selection or all discs  
Repeat mode is off.  
The system plays back the disc/  
file normally.  
No  
indication  
7 For DVD VIDEO/DVD VR: During playback  
7 For VCD/SVCD: During playback without PBC  
function or while stopped  
7 For DVD AUDIO/CD/MP3/JPEG/ASF/  
MPEG-2/MPEG-1/DivX: During playback or  
while stopped  
NOTE  
• When DVD VIDEO or DVD AUDIO is loaded in the system,  
playback of the disc next to the DVD VIDEO or DVD AUDIO will  
/REPEAT ALL on the TV screen or  
ALL in the display window is shown.  
• For DVD VIDEO and DVD AUDIO, REPEAT ALL and REPEAT  
DISC may not be available depending on the disc.  
not start, although  
When using the REPEAT button:  
Press REPEAT.  
When using the on-screen bar (except for MP3/WMA/JPEG/  
ASF/MPEG-2/MPEG-1/DivX):  
1 Press ON SCREEN twice.  
Repeat mode indicator  
The on-screen bar appears on the TV screen.  
Each time you press REPEAT, the Repeat mode changes.  
2 Press Cursor 3/2 to highlight  
3 Press ENTER.  
.
4 Press Cursor Y/5 repeatedly to select  
the Repeat mode.  
5 Press ENTER.  
6 Press ON SCREEN.  
The on-screen bar disappears.  
To cancel Repeat Playback  
Select “OFF” in step 4.  
35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
See page 26 for button locations.  
Advanced operations  
Repeating a desired part [A-B Repeat]  
You can repeat playback of a desired part by  
specifying the beginning (point A) and ending  
(point B).  
Tray lock  
You can lock the tray and prohibit unwanted disc ejection.  
On the center unit ONLY:  
7 During playback  
7 While the system is turned off  
1 Press ON SCREEN twice.  
The on-screen bar appears on the TV screen.  
2 Press Cursor 3/2 to highlight  
3 Press ENTER.  
.
Press and hold  
• “LOCKED” appears on the display window.  
• If you try to eject the disc, “LOCKED” appears to indicate that  
the tray is locked.  
4 Press Cursor Y/5 repeatedly to select  
To cancel  
“A-B”.  
Carry out the same operation again.  
• “UNLOCKED” appears on the display window.  
5 Press ENTER at the beginning of the  
part you want to repeat (point A).  
Setting the sound balance  
The repeat mode indicator “  
window.  
” appears on the display  
IMPORTANT  
Before using the remote control for the following  
operation;  
• Set the remote control mode selector to AUDIO.  
6 Press ENTER at the end of the part you  
want to repeat (point B).  
The repeat mode indicator on the display window changes to  
NOTE  
” and A-B Repeat Playback starts.  
• Before you start operation; There is a time limit when  
doing the following steps. If the setting is canceled before you finish,  
1staPrtrfreomssstSepE1TagTaiInN. G.  
7 Press ON SCREEN.  
The on-screen bar disappears.  
To cancel  
Select “OFF” in step 4, then press ENTER.  
NOTE  
• When playing back a DVD VIDEO/DVD VR, A-B Repeat Playback is  
possible only within the same title.  
• “A-B” cannot be selected during Program and Random Playback.  
• “A-B” cannot be selected during playback with PBC function.  
2 Press Cursor 3/2 to make an  
adjustment or selection.  
You can adjust the balance of the sound between “R (right)  
–21” and “L (left) –21. To set the balance to normal, select  
“CNTR (center).  
The adjustment is set and the display automatically disappears  
a few seconds later.  
36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting DVD preferences  
NOTE  
Using the setup menus  
• See the following “The language codes list” for the code of each  
language, such as “AA”, etc.  
You can change the language used in the setup menus. See “Menu  
description” below.  
The language codes list  
Basic operation on the setup menus  
AA Afar  
IK Inupiak  
RN Kirundi  
IMPORTANT  
Before using the remote control for the  
following operation;  
AB Abkhazian  
AF Afrikaans  
AM Ameharic  
AR Arabic  
AS Assamese  
AY Aymara  
AZ Azerbaijani  
BA Bashkir  
BE Byelorussian  
BG Bulgarian  
BH Bihari  
BI Bislama  
BN Bengali, Bangla  
BO Tibetan  
BR Breton  
CA Catalan  
CO Corsican  
CS Czech  
IN Indonesian  
RO Rumanian  
RW Kinyarwanda  
SA Sanskrit  
SD Sindhi  
SG Sangho  
IS  
IW Hebrew  
JI Yiddish  
Icelandic  
1
Set the remote control mode selector  
to AUDIO.  
JW Javanese  
KA Georgian  
KK Kazakh  
KL Greenlandic  
KM Cambodian  
KN Kannada  
KO Korean (KOR)  
KS Kashmiri  
KU Kurdish  
2
Press DVD or USB MEMORY.  
SH Serbo-Croatian  
SI  
Singhalese  
SK Slovak  
SL Slovenian  
SM Samoan  
SN Shona  
SO Somali  
SQ Albanian  
SR Serbian  
SS Siswati  
ST Sesotho  
SU Sundanese  
SV Swedish  
SW Swahili  
TA Tamil  
Cursor  
(3/2/Y/5)/  
ENTER  
KY Kirghiz  
LA Latin  
LN Lingala  
LO Laothian  
LT Lithuanian  
LV Latvian, Lettish  
MG Malagasy  
MI Maori  
MK Macedonian  
ML Malayalam  
MN Mongolian  
MO Moldavian  
MR Marathi  
MS Malay (MAY)  
MT Maltese  
MY Burmese  
NA Nauru  
NE Nepali  
NL Dutch  
NO Norwegian  
OC Occitan  
OM (Afan) Oromo  
OR Oriya  
PA Panjabi  
PL Polish  
PS Pashto, Pushto  
PT Portuguese  
QU Quechua  
RM Rhaeto-Romance  
7 While stopped  
CY Welsh  
1 Press SET UP.  
DA Danish  
DZ Bhutani  
EL Greek  
EO Esperanto  
ET Estonian  
EU Basque  
FA Persian  
FI Finnish  
FJ Fiji  
FO Faroese  
FY Frisian  
GA Irish  
GD Scots Gaelic  
GL Galician  
GN Guarani  
GU Gujarati  
HA Hausa  
TE Telugu  
TG Tajik  
TH Thai  
TI Tigrinya  
TK Turkmen  
TL Tagalog  
TN Setswana  
TO Tonga  
TR Turkish  
TS Tsonga  
TT Tatar  
TW Twi  
UK Ukrainian  
UR Urdu  
UZ Uzbek  
VI Vietnamese  
VO Volapuk  
WO Wolof  
XH Xhosa  
YO Yoruba  
ZU Zulu  
2 Follow the instructions that appear on  
the TV screen.  
Menu description  
: Language menu (LANGUAGE)  
HI Hindi  
HR Croatian  
HU Hungarian  
HY Armenian  
IA Interlingua  
IE Interlingue  
7 MENU LANGUAGE  
Some DVDs have their own menus in multiple languages.  
• Select the initial language*.  
7 AUDIO LANGUAGE  
Some DVDs have multiple audio languages.  
• Select the initial audio language*.  
7 SUBTITLE  
Some DVDs have multiple subtitle languages.  
• Select the initial subtitle language*.  
7 ON SCREEN LANGUAGE  
Select the language shown on the TV screen when operating this  
system.  
* When the language you have selected is not recorded to a disc,  
the original language is automatically used as the initial language.  
37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting DVD preferences  
: Picture menu (PICTURE)  
: Audio menu (AUDIO)  
7 D. RANGE COMPRESSION  
7 MONITOR TYPE  
(Dynamic range compression)  
You can select the monitor type to match your TV when you play  
DVDs recorded in the picture’s height/width ratio of 16:9.  
16:9/16:9 MULTI (Wide television conversion)  
Select this when the aspect ratio of your TV is fixed on 16:9 (wide  
TV).  
You can enjoy low level recorded sound clearly at night even at a low  
volume when listening to the sound with Dolby Digital.  
• AUTO  
Select this when you want to enjoy surround sound with its full  
dynamic range (no effect applied).  
• ON  
When you play DVDs recorded in the pictures height/width ratio  
of 4:3, the system adjust the ratio of output signal automatically.  
4:3 LB/4:3 MULTI LB (Letter Box conversion)  
Select this when the aspect ratio of your TV is 4:3 (conventional  
TV). While viewing a wide screen picture, the black bars appear  
on the top and the bottom of the screen.  
4:3 PS/4:3 MULTI PS (Pan Scan conversion)  
Select this when the aspect ratio of your TV is 4:3 (conventional  
TV). While viewing a wide screen picture, the black bars do not  
appear, however, the left and right edges of the pictures will not  
be shown on the screen.  
Select this when you want to fully apply the compression effect  
(useful at midnight).  
NOTE  
• When you play a multichannel Dolby Digital source with the  
surround mode is off, the setting of D. RANGE COMPRESSION is set  
to ON automatically.  
: Speaker setting menu (SPK. SETTING)  
7 Level menu (LEVEL)  
FRONT LEFT SPEAKER/FRONT RIGHT SPEAKER/CENTER  
SPEAKER/SURROUND RIGHT SPEAKER/SURROUND LEFT  
SPEAKER  
While monitoring the test tone, adjust the center and surround  
speakers volume as much as that of the front speakers.  
You can adjust the output level in the –6 dB to +6 dB range.  
Ex.: 16:9  
Ex.: 4:3 LB  
Ex.: 4:3 PS  
NOTE  
• Even if “4:3 PS” or “4:3 MULTI PS” is selected, the screen size may  
become “4:3 LB” or “4:3 MULTI LB” with some DVDs. This depends  
on how DVDs are recorded.  
• When selecting “MULTI” options as the monitor type for the multi-  
color system TV, the system outputs PAL or NTSC video signal  
according to the disc/file, regardless of the scan mode setting (see  
page 20).  
TEST TONE*  
Outputs the test tone.  
* The test tone comes out of all of the activated speakers in the  
following sequence:  
Front left speaker Z Center speaker Z Front right speaker  
Z Surround right speaker Z Surround left speaker Z (back  
to the beginning)  
7 PICTURE SOURCE  
When you set the scan mode to the progressive mode (see page 20),  
you can obtain optimal picture quality by selecting whether the  
content on the disc/file is processed by frame (film source) or by  
field (video source).  
NOTE  
• For adjustment of subwoofer output level, see page 39.  
Normally set to AUTO”.  
• AUTO  
7 Delay menu (DELAY)  
FRONT LEFT SPEAKER/FRONT RIGHT SPEAKER/CENTER  
SPEAKER/SURROUND RIGHT SPEAKER/SURROUND LEFT  
SPEAKER  
Used to play a disc/file containing both video and film source  
materials.  
This system recognizes the source type (video or film) of the  
current disc/file according to the disc/file information.  
If the playback picture is unclear or noisy, or the oblique lines of  
the picture are rough, try to change to other modes.  
• FILM  
Suitable for playing back a film source disc/file.  
• VIDEO  
Suitable for playing back a video source disc/file.  
Adjust the distance from the listening position to the speakers.  
Within the range from 0 ms to 15 ms (by 1 ms).  
Example:  
Center speaker  
Subwoofer  
1 ms  
Front right  
Front left  
0 ms  
7 SCREEN SAVER (See page 23.)  
0 ms  
You can activate or deactivate screen saver function.  
3.0 m  
2.7 m  
2.4 m  
7 FILE TYPE  
2.1 m  
Surround left  
When several types of files are recorded on a disc/device, you can  
select which files to play.  
2 ms  
Surround right  
2 ms  
• AUDIO  
Select this to play MP3/WMA files.  
• STILL PICTURE  
Select this to play JPEG files.  
• VIDEO  
1 ms increase (or decrease) in delay time corresponds to about  
30 cm decrease (or increase) in distance.  
Set to “0 ms” for the furthest speaker from your position as the basis  
for the delay time setting.  
Select this to play ASF/MPEG-2/MPEG-1/DivX files.  
In this case, set the delay time of each speaker as follows;  
• Delay time of front speakers: 0 ms  
• Delay time of center speaker: 1 ms  
• Delay time of surround speakers: 2 ms  
38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting DVD preferences  
7 Subwoofer menu (SUBWOOFER)  
: Other setting menu (OTHERS)  
LEVEL  
You can set the output level of the subwoofer in the –6 dB to +6 dB  
range.  
7 RESUME  
You can activate or deactivate Resume Playback function. (See page  
31.)  
CROSS OVER  
The signals below the preset frequency level will be sent to and be  
reproduced by the subwoofer.  
7 ON SCREEN GUIDE  
Select one of the crossover frequency levels according to the size of  
the small speaker connected.  
You can activate or deactivate the on-screen guide icons. (See page  
22.)  
For TH-C60/ Size of the cone speaker unit  
For TH-C90  
7 DivX registration menu (DivX REGISTRATION)  
The system has its own Registration Code for DivX playback.  
You can confirm the code of your system.  
• Once you play back a disc created by using the Registration Code,  
the system’s code is overwritten by a totally different new one for  
copyright protection purpose.  
TH-C20  
built in the speaker  
80Hz  
100Hz  
120Hz  
120Hz  
8 cm  
6 cm  
5 cm  
150Hz  
200Hz  
Tuner operations  
IMPORTANT  
Before using the remote control for the  
following operation;  
Setting the AM tuner interval  
spacing  
1
Set the remote control mode selector to  
AUDIO.  
Some countries space AM stations 9 kHz apart, and some countries  
2
Press FM/AM.  
use 10 kHz spacing.  
You can only change the AM tuner interval spacing while selecting  
AM as the band.  
The buttons described below are used on pages 39 and 40.  
On the center unit ONLY:  
7 To change the interval spacing into 10 kHz  
Press 8 while holding down 7.  
7 To change the interval spacing into 9 kHz  
Press 3 while holding down 7.  
Manual tuning  
Number  
buttons  
On the remote control:  
1 Press FM/AM repeatedly to select the  
Remote  
control mode  
selector  
band.  
Example: When the system is tuned in to AM 810 kHz.  
Cursor  
(3/2)  
2 Press TUNING 9/( repeatedly until  
you find the frequency you want.  
When you hold down the button until the system starts  
searching for stations and then release it, the system stops  
searching automatically when a station of sufficient signal  
strength is tuned in to.  
On the center unit:  
1 Press SOURCE repeatedly to select the  
band (FM or AM).  
2 Press TUNING +/– repeatedly until you  
find the frequency you want.  
NOTE  
• When an FM stereo program is received, the ST indicator lights on  
the display window.  
39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
See page 39 for button locations.  
Tuner operations  
Preset tuning  
Selecting the FM reception  
mode  
When the stereo FM program currently tuned in is noisy, you can  
change the FM reception mode to improve the reception.  
Once a station is assigned to a channel number, the station can be  
quickly tuned in. You can preset 30 FM and 15 AM stations.  
7 To preset the stations  
7 While listening to an FM station  
1 Tune in the station you want to preset.  
Press FM MODE.  
• If you want to store the FM reception mode for an FM  
station, select the reception mode you want. See “Selecting  
the FM reception mode” on the right column.  
The FM reception mode appears on the display window.  
Each time you press the button, the FM reception mode changes.  
• AUTO:  
Example: When the system is tuned in to FM 103.50 MHz.  
When a program is broadcast in stereo, you will hear stereo  
sound. (The ST indicator lights on the display window.) When in  
monaural, you will hear monaural sound. This mode is also  
useful to suppress static noise between stations.  
• MONO:  
Reception will be improved although you will lose the stereo  
effect. (The MONO indicator lights on the display window.) In  
this mode, you will hear noise until you are tuned in to a station.  
2 Press MEMORY.  
While “CH” and “_ _” are flashing:  
Reducing the noise of AM  
broadcast  
When listening to an AM broadcast with a lot of noise interference,  
you can change the Beat Cut mode to reduce the noise.  
3 Press number button(s) (1-10, h10) to  
select a preset number you want.  
• For details on using the number buttons, see “How to use the  
number buttons. (See page 24.)  
Example: When the preset channel 1 is selected.  
7 While listening to an AM station  
Press FM MODE.  
The current Beat Cut mode appears on the display window.  
Each time you press the button, the Beat Cut mode changes.  
• Choose “BEATCUT1” or “BEATCUT2” according to which gives  
clearer sound.  
If the setting is canceled before you finish, start from step 2  
again.  
While the selected number is flashing:  
4 Press MEMORY.  
“STORED” appears on the display window.  
The station is assigned to the selected preset number.  
If the setting is canceled before you finish, start from step 2  
again.  
5 Repeat steps 1 to 4.  
• Storing a new station to a used number erases the previously  
stored one.  
7 To tune in to a preset station  
1 Press FM/AM repeatedly to select FM or  
AM.  
2 Press number button(s) (1-10, h10) to  
select a preset number.  
• For details on using the number buttons, see “How to use the  
number buttons. (See page 24.)  
NOTE  
• You can also select a preset number by pressing Cursor 3/2.  
40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Karaoke operations  
• The icon such as  
shows the disc formats or file types the  
operation is available for.  
Basic Karaoke operations  
1 Connect a microphone to  
MIC 1 or MIC 2 on the center  
unit.  
IMPORTANT  
Before using the remote control for the following  
operation;  
• Set the remote control mode selector to AUDIO.  
2 Press KARAOKE to activate Karaoke  
function.  
The buttons described below are used on pages 41 to 43.  
The  
indicator lights on the display window.  
3 Start playback.  
To select audio channels for Karaoke disc (except CD and  
MP3/WMA disc), see page 42.  
To enjoy Karaoke with a normal disc (containing no  
multiplex audio or multisound Karaoke audio, etc.) by  
masking the vocal recorded on the disc, see page 43.  
Number  
buttons  
4 Turn MIC LEVEL to adjust the  
Remote  
controlmode  
selector  
microphones volume.  
• This control adjusts the output volume of both MIC 1 and  
MIC 2 together.  
5 Sing along with the playback of the  
song.  
To add an echo effect to your voice, see page 43.  
To shift the pitch of the playback sound, see page 43.  
Cursor  
(Y/5)  
To turn off Karaoke function  
Press KARAOKE so that  
disappears from the display window.  
To repeat a disc/chapter/title/track during Karaoke mode  
Set the Repeat mode. See “Repeat Playback. (See page 35.)  
To enjoy Karaoke using a menu screen  
See “Playing from a specified position on a disc. (See page 29.)  
NOTE  
• While playback is paused, no sound (voice) through the microphone  
is heard from the speakers. When the headphones are connected,  
there is a case that the sound (voice) through the microphone comes  
out from the headphones though playback is paused.  
• Karaoke function is available only when the source is DVD.  
• You cannot turn on Karaoke function while playing back a DVD  
AUDIO/DVD VR/JPEG/ASF/MPEG-2/MPEG-1/DivX disc.  
• Karaoke function will be canceled by following operations;  
– Changing the source (See page 19.)  
– Playing back a DVD AUDIO/DVD VR/JPEG/ASF/MPEG-2/  
MPEG-1/DivX disc  
• When Karaoke function is on, the surround mode (see page 26) is  
canceled.  
41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
See page 41 for button locations.  
Karaoke operations  
Reserving songs  
Selecting audio  
You can reserve your desired songs (groups/titles  
and tracks/chapters) to play in the order of your  
choice.  
Most Karaoke discs have the capability of adding “Guide vocal” or  
“Guide melody” to the Karaoke accompaniment.  
Up to 12 songs can be reserved with this function.  
Selecting audio channel(s) [AUDIO]  
7 While stopped with Karaoke function is turned on  
With most Karaoke discs, you can select audio  
channel(s) among some options called “with guide  
vocal, with guide melody, and “accompaniment  
only, etc. to enjoy Karaoke to your preference.  
1 Press RESERVE.  
The reservation list appears on the TV screen.  
2 Press number buttons (0-10, h10) to  
select the song you want to reserve by  
specifying the disc, group/title, and  
7 During playback  
1 Press AUDIO.  
The following indication appears on the TV screen.  
track/chapter numbers.  
• Press the number buttons to select a song in the following  
order:  
Example for a VCD:  
1 Select a disc.  
2 Select a title/group.  
3 Select a chapter/track.  
2 Press AUDIO repeatedly or press Cursor  
Y/5 repeatedly to select the desired  
audio channel.  
Each time you press AUDIO, audio channel changes as follows;  
Example for a VCD:  
• For details on using the number buttons, see “How to use the  
number buttons. (See page 24.)  
• ST: To listen to L (left) and R (right) audio channel.  
• L: To listen to L (left) audio channel.  
• R: To listen to R (right) audio channel.  
To erase a reserved song  
Press Cursor Y/5 to select the reservation number of unwanted  
song, then press CANCEL.  
To add a song to the reservation list  
Press Cursor Y/5 to select the reservation number of the song  
before which you want to insert a new song, then specify a new song  
by repeating step 2.  
3 Repeat step 2 to reserve the rest of  
your selection.  
4 Start playback of the reserved songs.  
To hide or show the reservation list  
Press RESERVE. Each time you press RESERVE, the reservation list  
disappears/appears from/on the TV screen.  
NOTE  
• While the reservation list is not displayed on the TV screen, you  
cannot start playback of the reserved songs. Be sure to press RESERVE  
to display the reservation list before you start playback.  
• You can additionally reserve a song after the current playing reserved  
song. In such a case, press 7 and perform the procedure from step 2  
through 4.  
42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
See page 41 for button locations.  
Karaoke operations  
Masking the vocal recorded on a normal disc  
[VOCAL MASK]  
You can enjoy Karaoke with a normal disc  
(containing no multiplex audio or multisound  
Karaoke audio, etc.) by attenuating the frequencies  
around a human voice with this function.  
Shifting the pitch of the  
playback sound  
You can sharp/flat the pitch of a song recorded on  
a disc by a halftone interval to match your voice  
range. Note that this setting is applied only to the  
current title/track.  
7 During playback with Karaoke function turned on  
Press VOCAL.  
7 During playback with Karaoke function turned on  
Each time you press VOCAL, vocal mask function turns on and off  
Press KEY i/I repeatedly to adjust the  
alternately.  
pitch (–6 to +6).  
NOTE  
• Press KEY ito sharp and KEY Ito flat the pitch.  
• The voice may not be masked enough with some discs.  
• For DVD VIDEO/VCD/SVCD/CD, the following indication  
appears when pressing KEY i/I.  
Adding an echo effect to your  
voice  
7 During playback with Karaoke function turned  
• For MP3/WMA, the following indication is shown in the file  
on  
control display.  
.
Press ECHO repeatedly to  
select the desired effect level.  
“ECHO” and its value appear on the display window.  
• Each time you press ECHO, vocal option changes as follows;  
To return to normal playback  
Select “0” in the procedure above.  
OFF Z 1 Z 2 Z 3 Z (back to the beginning)  
NOTE  
• As the number increases, the effect will be emphasized.  
• Depending on the type of the recorded source (such as a DTS Digital  
Surround software, etc.), you may not be able to shift the pitch.  
To cancel the sound effect  
Select “OFF” in the procedure above.  
43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
References  
To clean the disc  
Wipe the disc with a soft cloth in a straight line  
from center to edge.  
Maintenance  
• DO NOT use any solvent — such as  
conventional record cleaner, spray,  
thinner or benzine — to clean the disc.  
7 Handling Discs  
• Remove the disc from its case by holding it at  
the edge while pressing the center hole lightly.  
• Do not touch the shiny surface of the disc or  
bend the disc.  
7 Cleaning the system  
• Stains on the system should be wiped off with a soft cloth. If the  
system is heavily stained, wipe it with a cloth soaked in water-  
diluted neutral detergent and wrung well, then wipe clean with a  
dry cloth.  
• Put the disc back in its case after use to  
prevent warping.  
• Be careful not to scratch the surface of the disc  
when placing it back in its case.  
• Avoid exposure to direct sunlight, extreme  
temperature and moisture.  
• Since the system may deteriorate in quality, become damaged or  
get its paint peeled off, be careful about the following.  
DO NOT wipe it with a hard cloth.  
DO NOT wipe it forcefully.  
DO NOT wipe it with thinner or benzine.  
DO NOT apply any volatile substance such as insecticides to it.  
DO NOT allow any rubber or plastic to remain in contact with  
it for a long time.  
Troubleshooting  
PROBLEM  
POSSIBLE CAUSE  
SOLUTION  
Power does not come on. The power cord and/or system cord is not connected.  
Connect the power cord and system cord correctly. (See  
pages 14 and 15.)  
The remote control does The batteries are exhausted.  
Replace the batteries. (See page 7.)  
not work.  
Sunlight is shining directly on the remote sensor.  
Hide the remote sensor from direct sunlight.  
No sound.  
The system cord and/or speaker cord is not connected. Check the connection.  
The audio cord is not connected to AUX IN (VCR),  
TAPE IN (only for TH-C90) and/or DIGITAL IN (DBS)  
correctly.  
Connect the cord correctly. (See page 14.)  
An incorrect source has been selected.  
The video cord is not connected correctly.  
The disc or file is not playable.  
Select the correct source. (See page 19.)  
Connect the cord correctly. (See page 13.)  
Use a playable disc or file. (See pages 3 and 4.)  
No picture is displayed  
on the TV screen.  
No picture is displayed  
on the TV screen, the  
The scan mode is set to the progressive mode  
Change the scan mode to the interlace mode  
(“NT. 480I” or “PAL. 576I”). (See page 20.)  
(“NT. 480P” or “PAL. 576P”) though the center unit is  
picture is blurred, or the connected to the TV which does not support the  
picture is divided into  
two parts.  
progressive video input such as a conventional TV.  
Video and audio are  
distorted.  
The disc is scratched or dirty.  
Replace or clean the disc.  
A VCR is connected between the center unit and the  
TV.  
Connect the center unit and TV directly. (See page 13.)  
The picture does not fit The monitor type is not set correctly.  
the TV screen.  
Set “MONITOR TYPE” properly. (See page 38.)  
The broadcast is hard to Antennas are disconnected.  
hear because of noise.  
Reconnect the antennas correctly and securely. (See  
page 8.)  
If there are any other cases than the noted above or if this system does not seem to work properly, turn off the system and turn it back on.  
44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
References  
7 Subwoofer (SP-PWC90)  
Specifications  
Amplifier section  
Front/Center/Surround:  
140 W per channel, RMS at 4 at  
1 kHz, with 10 % total harmonic  
distortion.  
300 W, RMS at 4 at 40 Hz, with 10 %  
total harmonic distortion.  
7 Center unit (XV-THC90/XV-THC60/XV-THC20)  
Audio section  
1
Subwoofer:  
Digital input* :  
DIGITAL IN (DBS):  
(OPTICAL)  
* Corresponding to Linear PCM, Dolby Digital, and DTS Digital  
Surround (with sampling frequency — 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz,  
48 kHz)  
–21 dBm to –15 dBm  
(660 nm E30 nm)  
Speaker section  
Speaker unit:  
Power Handling Capacity: 300 W  
Impedance:  
Frequency Range:  
Sound Pressure Level:  
General  
1
25 cm Bass-reflex  
4 Ω  
Analog input:  
AUX IN (VCR)  
25 Hz to 200 Hz  
74 dB/W·m  
TAPE IN (Only for XV-THC90)  
TAPE OUT (Only for XV-THC90)  
Analog output:  
Power Requirements:  
AC 110 V/ AC 127 V/  
Video section  
Video System:  
Horizontal Resolution:  
Signal-to-Noise Ratio:  
Video output level  
Composite:  
AC 220 - 240 V  
, 50/60 Hz  
PAL/NTSC  
500 lines  
64 dB  
Power Consumption:  
Dimensions (W M H M D):  
Mass:  
110 W (at operation)  
0 W (in standby mode)  
264 mm M 481 mm M 459 mm  
1.0 V(p-p)/75 Ω  
1.0 V(p-p)/75 Ω  
17.6 kg  
S-video-Y:  
S-video-C:  
For PAL: 0.3 V(p-p)/75 Ω  
For NTSC: 0.286 V(p-p)/75 Ω  
1.0 V(p-p)/75 Ω  
7 Subwoofer (SP-PWC60)  
Amplifier section  
Front/Center/Surround:  
Component-Y:  
Component-PB/PR:  
Video input sensitivity/Impedance (VCR IN)  
0.7 V(p-p)/75 Ω  
135 W per channel, RMS at 4 at  
1 kHz, with 10 % total harmonic  
distortion.  
135 W, RMS at 4 at 100 Hz, with  
10 % total harmonic distortion.  
Composite:  
S-video-Y:  
S-video-C:  
1.0 V(p-p)/75 Ω  
1.0 V(p-p)/75 Ω  
For PAL: 0.3 V(p-p)/75 Ω  
For NTSC: 0.286 V(p-p)/75 Ω  
Subwoofer:  
Speaker section  
Speaker unit:  
16 cm Bass-reflex  
USB storage  
USB specification:  
Power Handling Capacity: 140 W  
Compatible with the USB 2.0 Full-  
Speed  
Mass Storage Class  
FAT16, FAT32  
Max. 500 mA  
Impedance:  
Frequency Range:  
Sound Pressure Level:  
4 Ω  
30 Hz to 200 Hz  
75 dB/W·m  
Compatible device:  
Compatible file system:  
Bus power supply:  
General  
Power Requirements:  
AC 110 V/ AC 127 V/  
Tuner section  
Tuning Range  
FM:  
AC 220 - 240 V  
, 50/60 Hz  
Power Consumption:  
Dimensions (W M H M D):  
Mass:  
135 W (at operation)  
0 W (in standby mode)  
87.50 MHz to 108.00 MHz  
At 10 kHz intervals  
530 kHz to 1 710 kHz (*1 600 kHz)  
At 9 kHz intervals  
531 kHz to 1 710 kHz (*1 602 kHz)  
AM:  
171 mm M 411 mm M 458 mm  
12.3 kg  
* For the countries of the Middle East  
7 Subwoofer (SP-PWC20)  
Amplifier section  
Front/Center/Surround:  
General  
Power Requirements:  
Power Consumption:  
Dimensions (W M H M D):  
Mass:  
135 W per channel, RMS at 4 at  
1 kHz, with 10 % total harmonic  
distortion.  
135 W, RMS at 4 at 100 Hz, with  
10 % total harmonic distortion.  
AC 110 - 240 V  
, 50/60 Hz  
25 W (at operation)  
1.2 W (in standby mode)  
Subwoofer:  
400 mm M 85 mm M 316 mm  
Speaker section  
Speaker unit:  
Power Handling Capacity: 140 W  
Impedance:  
3.8 kg  
16 cm Bass-reflex  
4 Ω  
Frequency Range:  
Sound Pressure Level:  
30 Hz to 200 Hz  
74 dB/W·m  
General  
Power Requirements:  
AC 110 V/ AC 127 V/  
AC 220 - 240 V  
, 50/60 Hz  
Power Consumption:  
Dimensions (W M H M D):  
Mass:  
135 W (at operation)  
0 W (in standby mode)  
170 mm M 411 mm M 458 mm  
11.5 kg  
45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
References  
Surround speakers (SP-THC60S)  
7 Satellite Speakers — SP-XTHC90  
Type:  
2-way 3-speaker Bass reflex type  
Front speakers (SP-THC90F)  
Speaker:  
5.5 cm cone M 2  
Type:  
2-way 3-speaker Bass reflex type  
3.0 cm dome M 1  
(Magnetically shielded Type)  
13.5 cm cone M 2  
Power Handling Capacity: 140 W  
Impedance:  
Frequency Range:  
Sound Pressure Level:  
Dimensions (W M H M D):  
Speaker:  
4 Ω  
6.0 cm cone M 1  
100 Hz to 20 000 Hz  
79 dB/W·m  
Power Handling Capacity: 140 W  
Impedance:  
Frequency Range:  
Sound Pressure Level:  
Dimensions (W M H M D):  
4 Ω  
60 Hz to 20 000 Hz  
89 dB/W·m  
280 mm M 1 114 mm M 280 mm  
Mass:  
3.4 kg each  
270 mm M 1 027.5 mm M 320 mm  
7 Satellite Speakers — SP-XTHC20  
Front speakers (SP-THC20F)  
Mass:  
8.8 kg each  
Center speaker (SP-THC90C)  
Type:  
1-way Bass reflex type  
Type:  
2-way 3-speaker Bass reflex type  
(Magnetically shielded Type)  
(Magnetically shielded Type)  
10.5 cm cone M 2  
Speaker:  
8.0 cm cone M 1  
Speaker:  
Power Handling Capacity: 140 W  
4.0 cm cone M 1  
Impedance:  
Frequency Range:  
4 Ω  
Power Handling Capacity: 140 W  
Impedance:  
Frequency Range:  
Sound Pressure Level:  
Dimensions (W M H M D):  
90 Hz to 20 000 Hz  
78 dB/W·m  
4 Ω  
Sound Pressure Level:  
Dimensions (W M H M D):  
65 Hz to 20 000 Hz  
89 dB/W·m  
106 mm M 119.5 mm M 102 mm  
Mass:  
0.55 kg each  
400 mm M 141 mm M 171.5 mm  
Center speaker (SP-THC20C)  
Mass:  
3.8 kg  
Type:  
1-way Bass reflex type  
Surround speakers (SP-THC90S)  
(Magnetically shielded Type)  
Type:  
2-way Bass reflex type  
Speaker:  
8.0 cm cone M 1  
Speaker:  
10.5 cm cone M 1  
Power Handling Capacity: 140 W  
4.0 cm cone M 1  
Impedance:  
Frequency Range:  
4 Ω  
Power Handling Capacity: 140 W  
Impedance:  
Frequency Range:  
Sound Pressure Level:  
Dimensions (W M H M D):  
90 Hz to 20 000 Hz  
78 dB/W·m  
4 Ω  
Sound Pressure Level:  
Dimensions (W M H M D):  
75 Hz to 20 000 Hz  
81 dB/W·m  
106 mm M 119.5 mm M 102 mm  
Mass:  
0.55 kg  
140 mm M 228.5 mm M 174 mm  
Surround speakers (SP-THC20S)  
Mass:  
1.7 kg each  
Type:  
1-way Bass reflex type  
Speaker:  
8.0 cm cone M 1  
7 Satellite Speakers — SP-XTHC60  
Front speakers (SP-THC60F)  
Power Handling Capacity: 140 W  
Impedance:  
Frequency Range:  
Sound Pressure Level:  
Dimensions (W M H M D):  
4 Ω  
Type:  
1-way 2-speaker Bass reflex type  
90 Hz to 20 000 Hz  
76 dB/W·m  
(Magnetically shielded Type)  
Speaker:  
5.5 cm cone M 2  
Power Handling Capacity: 140 W  
106 mm M 119.5 mm M 102 mm  
Impedance:  
Frequency Range:  
4 Ω  
Mass:  
0.63 kg each  
100 Hz to 20 000 Hz  
79 dB/W·m  
Sound Pressure Level:  
Dimensions (W M H M D):  
Designs & specifications are subject to change without notice.  
280 mm M 1 106 mm M 280 mm  
Mass:  
3.3 kg each  
Center speaker (SP-THC60C)  
Type:  
1-way 2-speaker Bass reflex type  
(Magnetically shielded Type)  
Speaker:  
6.5 cm cone M 2  
Power Handling Capacity: 140 W  
Impedance:  
Frequency Range:  
4 Ω  
90 Hz to 20 000 Hz  
82 dB/W·m  
Sound Pressure Level:  
Dimensions (W M H M D):  
250 mm M 85 mm M 91 mm  
Mass:  
0.8 kg  
46  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Mains (AC) Line Instruction  
CAUTION for mains (AC) line  
BEFORE PLUGGING IN, do check that your mains (AC) line voltage  
corresponds with the position of the voltage selector switch provided on  
the outside of this equipment and, if different, reset the voltage selector  
switch, to prevent from a damage or risk of fire/electric shock.  
For SP-PWC60/  
SP-PWC20  
For SP-PWC90  
EN  
© 2006 Victor Company of Japan, Limited  
0706RYMMDWJSC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DVD DIGITAL CINEMA SYSTEM  
TH-C90  
Consists of XV-THC90, SP-PWC90,  
SP-THC90F, SP-THC90C and SP-THC90S  
INSTRUCTIONS  
LVT1504-010A  
[A]  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Warnings, Cautions and Others  
IMPORTANT FOR LASER PRODUCTS  
1. CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT  
2. CAUTION: Do not open the top cover. There are no user  
serviceable parts inside the unit; leave all servicing to qualified  
service personnel.  
3. CAUTION: Visible and/or invisible class 1M laser radiation  
when open. Do not view directly with optical instruments.  
CAUTION  
To reduce the risk of electrical shocks, fire, etc.:  
1. Do not remove screws, covers or cabinet.  
2. Do not expose this appliance to rain or moisture.  
CAUTION —  
(XV-THC90)  
button!  
Disconnect the mains plug to shut the power off completely  
(the STANDBY lamp goes off). When installing the apparatus,  
ensure that the plug is easily accessible.  
The  
button in any position does not disconnect the mains  
line.  
• When the system is on standby, the STANDBY lamp lights  
red.  
• When the system is turned on, the STANDBY lamp goes off.  
The power can be remote controlled.  
CAUTION  
(SP-PWC90)  
The power supply to the subwoofer is linked to the center unit.  
The POWER ON lamp on the subwoofer lights green when the  
power is turned on.  
G-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Warnings, Cautions and Others  
Caution: Proper Ventilation  
To avoid risk of electric shock and fire and to protect from damage, place the apparatus on a level surface. The minimal clearances are  
shown below:  
Wall or  
Wall or  
obstructions  
obstructions  
8 cm  
XV-THC90  
XV-THC90  
3 cm  
Front  
10 cm  
3 cm  
No  
obstructions  
15 cm  
Wall or obstructions  
Wall or  
obstructions  
20 cm  
Front  
SP-PWC90  
SP-PWC90  
No  
15 cm  
15 cm  
15 cm  
obstructions  
CAUTION!  
To avoid personal injury  
or accidentally dropping  
the unit, have two persons  
unpack, carry, and install  
the unit.  
SP-THC90: 47 kg  
CAUTION  
• Do not block the ventilation openings or holes.  
(If the ventilation openings or holes are blocked by a  
newspaper or cloth, etc., the heat may not be able to get out.)  
• Do not place any naked flame sources, such as lighted  
candles, on the apparatus.  
• When discarding batteries, environmental problems must be  
considered and local rules or laws governing the disposal of  
these batteries must be followed strictly.  
• Do not expose this apparatus to rain, moisture, dripping or  
splashing and that no objects filled with liquids, such as  
vases, shall be placed on the apparatus.  
[European Union only]  
G-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of contents  
Introduction ....................................................2  
Notes on handling ..................................................................... 2  
Supplied accessories .................................................................. 2  
Playback ........................................................ 19  
Basic playback ...........................................................................19  
One Touch Replay ...................................................................21  
Fast-forward/fast-reverse search ............................................21  
Skip to the beginning of a desired selection .........................22  
Skipping at about 5-minute intervals ....................................22  
Locating a desired title/group using number buttons ........22  
Playing back a bonus group ....................................................23  
Selecting the desired title/playlist from the control display .....23  
About discs ......................................................3  
Playable disc types ..................................................................... 3  
Playable file types ....................................................................... 4  
Description of parts and controls ..................5  
Connections .....................................................8  
Advanced operations ................................... 24  
Using the surround mode .......................................................24  
Using the on-screen bar ..........................................................25  
Playing from a specified position on a disc ..........................27  
Using the file control display ..................................................28  
Resume Playback ......................................................................29  
Selecting a view angle ..............................................................29  
Selecting the subtitle ................................................................29  
Selecting the audio ...................................................................30  
Special picture playback ..........................................................30  
Program Playback ....................................................................32  
Random Playback ....................................................................33  
Repeat Playback ........................................................................33  
Tray lock ....................................................................................34  
Setting the sound balance .......................................................34  
Connecting the FM and AM antennas ................................... 8  
Connecting the satellite (front, center, surround) speakers ......  
9
Speaker layout .......................................................................... 11  
Connecting a TV ...................................................................... 11  
Connecting the powered subwoofer ..................................... 12  
Connecting to an analog component ................................... 12  
Connecting a cassette recorder .............................................. 12  
Connecting to a digital component ...................................... 12  
Connecting a USB mass storage class device ....................... 13  
Connecting the power cord .................................................... 13  
Operating external components with the  
remote control ..............................................14  
Operating the TV ..................................................................... 14  
Operating the DBS tuner or CATV converter .................... 15  
Operating the VCR .................................................................. 15  
Setting DVD preferences ............................. 35  
Using the setup menus ............................................................35  
Menu description .....................................................................35  
Basic operations ............................................16  
Turning the system on/off ...................................................... 16  
Selecting the source to play .................................................... 17  
Adjusting the volume [VOLUME] ....................................... 17  
Listening with headphones (not supplied) .......................... 17  
Turning off the sound temporarily [MUTING] ................. 17  
Adjusting the brightness of the indications [DIMMER] ... 17  
Sleep Timer [SLEEP] ............................................................... 18  
Adjusting the output level of the subwoofer and speakers ......18  
Adjusting the sound ................................................................ 18  
Changing the scan mode ........................................................ 18  
Tuner operations .......................................... 37  
Setting the AM tuner interval spacing ..................................37  
Manual tuning ..........................................................................37  
Preset tuning .............................................................................38  
Selecting the FM reception mode ..........................................38  
Reducing the noise of AM broadcast ....................................38  
References .................................................... 39  
Maintenance .............................................................................39  
Troubleshooting .......................................................................39  
Specifications ............................................................................40  
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
7 Safety precautions  
Avoid moisture, water and dust  
Notes on handling  
7 Important cautions  
Installation of the system  
• Select a place which is level, dry and neither too hot nor too cold;  
between 5°C and 35°C.  
Do not place the system in moist or dusty places.  
Avoid high temperatures  
Do not expose the system to direct sunlight and do not place it near  
a heating device.  
When you are away  
When away on travel or for other reasons for an extended period of  
time, disconnect the power cord plugs from the wall outlet.  
• Leave sufficient distance between the system and the TV.  
• Do not use the system in a place subject to vibration.  
Power cord  
Do not block the vents  
Blocking the vents may damage the system.  
• Do not handle the power cord with wet hands.  
• A small amount of power is always consumed while the power  
cord is connected to the wall outlet (center unit only).  
• When unplugging the power cord from the wall outlet, always  
pull on the plug, not the power cord.  
Care of the cabinet  
When cleaning the system, use a soft cloth and follow the relevant  
instructions on the use of chemically-coated cloths. Do not use  
benzene, thinner or other organic solvents including disinfectants.  
These may cause deformation or discoloring.  
To prevent malfunctions of the system  
• There are no user-serviceable parts inside. If anything goes  
wrong, unplug the power cord and consult your dealer.  
• Do not insert any metallic object into the system.  
• Do not use any non-standard shape disc (like a heart, flower or  
credit card, etc.) available on the market, because it may damage  
the system.  
If water gets inside the system  
Turn the system off and disconnect the power cord plug from the  
wall outlet, then call the store where you made your purchase. Using  
the system in this condition may cause a fire or electrical shock.  
• Do not use a disc with tape, stickers, or paste on it, because it may  
damage the system.  
Supplied accessories  
Label sticker  
Check to be sure you have all of the supplied accessories.  
The number in parentheses is the quantity of the pieces supplied.  
If anything is missing, contact your dealer immediately.  
• Remote control (1)  
Sticker  
Paste  
• Batteries (2)  
• FM antenna (1)  
• AM loop antenna (1)  
Note about copyright laws  
• Power cord (1)  
Check the copyright laws in your country before recording from the  
discs. Recording of copyrighted material may infringe copyright  
laws.  
• System cord (1)  
• Composite video cord (1)  
• Speaker cords  
4 m: For satellite (front left/right) and center speakers (3)  
10 m: For satellite speakers (surround left/right) (2)  
• Screws  
Note about copyguard system  
The discs are protected by copyguard system. When you connect  
the system to your VCR directly, the copyguard system activates and  
the picture may not be played back correctly.  
M4 x 30 mm (8)  
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
About discs  
Notes on DVD-R and DVD-RW  
• This system does not support “multi-border” disc.  
Playable disc types  
Notes on CD-R and CD-RW  
• This system can play CD-Rs or CD-RWs recorded with ISO 9660  
format.  
This system has been designed to play back the following discs:  
DVD VIDEO  
DVD AUDIO  
• This system supports “multi-session” discs (up to 20 sessions).  
• This system cannot play “packet write” discs.  
Region code of DVD VIDEO  
VCD/SVCD  
Audio CD  
DVD VIDEO players and DVD VIDEO discs have their own  
Region Code numbers. This system can play back DVD VIDEO  
discs whose Region Code numbers include the system’s Region  
Code, which is indicated on the rear panel.  
• Example of playable DVD:  
The in the list below shows available disc types and recording  
formats.  
If a DVD with an improper Region Code number is loaded,  
“REGION CODE ERROR!” appears on the TV screen and playback  
cannot start.  
Disc type  
1
1
1
CD-R/-RW*  
DVD-R*  
DVD-RW*  
Recording  
format  
DVD Video  
DVD Audio  
DVD VR  
VCD/SVCD  
Audio CD  
MP3  
Some discs may not be played back because of their disc  
characteristics, recording conditions, or damage or stain on them.  
Unplayable discs  
DVD-ROM, DVD-RAM, CD-I (CD-I Ready), Photo CD, SACD,  
2
2
etc.  
*  
*  
Playing back these discs will generate noise and damage the  
speakers.  
2
2
WMA  
*  
*  
2
2
JPEG  
*  
*  
2
2
ASF  
*  
*  
3
2
2
MPEG-2  
MPEG-1  
DivX  
*  
*  
*  
3
2
2
*  
*  
*  
2
2
*  
*  
1
2
3
*
*
*
This system can play finalized discs only.  
Recorded with UDF Bridge format.  
This system may not be able to play back a file if the file size is  
too large.  
• It is possible to play back finalized +R/+RW (DVD Video Format  
only) discs. “DVD” lights on the display panel when a +R/+RW  
disc is loaded.  
• This system accommodates the NTSC and PAL system. When  
you play an NTSC disc with the scan mode set to PAL (see page  
18), the NTSC video signal is converted to the PAL60 signal and  
output.  
• The Non-DVD side of a “DualDisc” does not comply with the  
“Compact Disc Digital Audio” standard. Therefore, the use of  
Non-DVD side of a DualDisc on this product may not be  
recommended.  
• On some DVD VIDEOs, DVD AUDIOs, VCDs or SVCDs,  
their actual operation may be different from what is explained  
in this manual. This is due to the disc programming and disc  
structure, not a malfunction of this system.  
DVD Logo is a trademark of DVD Format/Logo Licensing  
Corporation.  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
About discs  
For JPEG files  
• We recommend to record a file at 640 x 480 resolution. (If a file  
has been recorded at a resolution of more than 640 x 480, it will  
take a longer time to be displayed.)  
Playable file types  
For all playable files  
• This system can only play baseline JPEG files.  
• The system can only recognize and play files with one of the  
following extensions, which can be in any combination of upper  
and lower case;  
For ASF files  
• The system supports the types of the advanced simple profile as  
MPEG-4 files (MPEG-4 ASF).  
• The system supports MPEG-4 files with the following conditions:  
File format: ASF  
Visual profile: MPEG-4 SP (Simple Profile)  
Audio CODEC: G.726  
MP3: .MP3, “.mp3”  
WMA: .WMA”, “.wma”  
JPEG: .JPG, “.JPEG, “.jpg, “.jpeg”  
ASF: .ASF, “.asf ”  
MPEG-2/MPEG-1: .MPG, “.MPEG, “.mpg, “.mpeg”  
DivX: .DIVX, “.DIV, “.divx, “.div, and .AVI, “.avi”  
• Some files may not be played back. In this case, “NOT  
SUPPORTED” appears on the TV screen.  
Max. picture size: 352 x 288 (CIF)  
Max. bit rate: 384 kbps  
• Some files may not be played back normally because of their disc  
characteristics or recording conditions.  
• The system recognizes up to 150 tracks (files) per group, 99  
groups per disc/device, and the total number of the tracks (files)  
that the system can play is 4000.  
• MP3/WMA/JPEG/ASF/MPEG-2/MPEG-1/DivX files require a  
longer readout time. (It differs due to the complexity of the  
directory/file configuration.)  
• If different kinds of files are mixed, set the FILE TYPE setting in  
the PICTURE menu to the appropriate setting for the data to be  
read (AUDIO, STILL PICTURE” or “VIDEO”). (See page 36.)  
For MPEG-2/MPEG-1 files  
• The stream format should conform to MPEG system/program  
stream.  
• 720 x 576 pixels (25 fps)/720 x 480 pixels (30 fps) is  
recommended for the highest resolution.  
• This system also supports the resolutions of 352 x 576/480 x 576/  
352 x 288 pixels (25 fps) and 352 x 480/480 x 480/352 x 240 pixels  
(30 fps).  
• The file format should be MP@ML (Main Profile at Main Level)/  
SP@ML (Simple Profile at Main Level)/MP@LL (Main Profile at  
Low Level).  
• Audio streams should conform to MPEG1 Audio Layer-2 or  
MPEG2 Audio Layer-2.  
For MP3/WMA files  
• The system supports MP3/WMA files recorded with a bit rate of  
32 – 320 kbps and a sampling frequency of 16 kHz, 22.05 kHz,  
24 kHz*, 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, or 48 kHz.  
• If the track information (track title, artist, and album name, etc.)  
is recorded, it appears in the file control display on the TV screen.  
(See page 28.)  
For DivX files  
• The system supports DivX 6.x, 5.x, 4.x and 3.11.  
• The system supports DivX files whose resolution is 720 x 480  
pixels or less (30 fps), and 720 x 576 pixels or less (25 fps).  
• Audio stream should conform to Dolby Digital (including multi  
channel) or MPEG1 Audio Layer-3 (MP3).  
• The system does not support GMC (Global Motion  
Compression).  
We recommend to record each piece of material (song) at a  
sample rate of 44.1 kHz and at a data transfer rate of  
128 (96*) kbps.  
* For WMA only  
• The file encoded in the interlaced scanning mode may not be  
played back correctly.  
• The system has its own Registration Code for DivX playback.  
If necessary, you can confirm the Registration Code of your  
system using the OTHERS menu. (See page 37.)  
• This product incorporates copyright protection technology that  
is protected by U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights.  
Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized  
by Macrovision, and is intended for home and other limited  
viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision.  
Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited.  
• “CONSUMERS SHOULD NOTE THAT NOT ALL HIGH  
DEFINITION TELEVISION SETS ARE FULLY COMPATIBLE  
WITH THIS PRODUCT AND MAY CAUSE ARTIFACTS TO  
BE DISPLAYED IN THE PICTURE. IN CASE OF 525 OR 625  
PROGRESSIVE SCAN PICTURE PROBLEMS, IT IS  
RECOMMENDED THAT THE USER SWITCH THE  
CONNECTION TO THE ‘STANDARD DEFINITION’  
OUTPUT.  
• USE OF THIS PRODUCT IN ANY MANNER THAT  
COMPLIES WITH THE MPEG-4 VISUAL STANDARD IS  
PROHIBITED, EXCEPT FOR USE BY A CONSUMER  
ENGAGING IN PERSONAL AND NON-COMMERCIAL  
ACTIVITIES.  
• DivX, DivX Ultra Certified, and associated logos are trademarks  
of DivX, Inc. and are used under license.  
• Official DivX® Ultra Certified product  
• Plays all versions of DivX video (including DivX 6) with  
enhanced playback of DivX® media files and the DivX® Media  
Format  
®
®
IF THERE ARE QUESTIONS REGARDING OUR TV SET  
COMPATIBILITY WITH THIS MODEL 525p AND 625p DVD  
PLAYER, PLEASE CONTACT OUR CUSTOMER SERVICE  
CENTER.”  
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Description of parts and controls  
Front panel (center unit)  
The numbers in the figures indicate the pages where the details of the parts are described.  
Display window  
21  
25  
37  
38  
20  
25  
18  
20  
22  
23  
32  
29  
33, 34  
17  
20  
31  
20  
38  
37  
33  
19  
19  
19  
21, 37  
Disc tray (inside): 19  
Remote sensor: 7  
17  
16  
16  
19  
13  
17  
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Description of parts and controls  
Rear panel (center unit)  
12  
12  
8
12  
13  
11  
11  
12  
12  
Powered subwoofer  
10  
See below.  
Power cord: 13  
POWER ON lamp: 16  
12  
Front  
Rear  
NOTE  
* Do not block the ventilation openings to allow proper air  
circulation by the cooling fan.  
• For safety reasons, always ensure that there is sufficient space behind  
the powered subwoofer.  
Setting the VOLTAGE SELECTOR  
Before plugging, set the correct voltage for your area with the voltage selector switch on the rear panel of the powered subwoofer.  
Voltage selector switch  
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Description of parts and controls  
Remote control  
Putting batteries in the remote control  
16  
15  
17  
19  
14  
14  
R03 (UM-4)/AAA (24F) type dry-cell  
batteries (supplied)  
Number  
buttons: 22  
14  
14  
14 - 37  
23, 27  
23, 27  
18 - 38  
If the range or effectiveness of the remote control decreases, replace  
both batteries.  
14, 17  
CAUTION  
25 - 34  
• Do not expose batteries to heat or flame.  
17  
Operating the system from the remote control  
Aim the remote control directly to the front panel of the center unit.  
• Do not block the remote sensor.  
15, 21  
19, 38  
22, 37  
29, 31  
29, 30  
33  
19, 38  
19  
21, 30  
31  
25  
32  
22  
27  
32, 33  
20  
35  
34  
19, 29, 31  
18  
18  
18  
18  
18, 31  
17  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Do not connect the power cord until all other connections have been made.  
Connections  
If reception is poor  
Connecting the FM and AM  
antennas  
Center unit  
7 AM loop antenna  
AM loop antenna  
Setting up supplied AM loop antenna  
Outdoor single vinyl-covered wire antenna  
(not supplied)  
If the antenna cord is covered with the insulation  
coat, twist and pull the insulation coat off and  
remove.  
7 FM antenna  
FM antenna (supplied)  
Center unit  
Connecting AM loop antenna  
Extend the supplied FM antenna  
horizontally.  
1
Center unit  
If reception is poor  
Center unit  
Outdoor FM antenna (not  
supplied)  
2
Standard type (75 Ω  
coaxial) connector  
Outdoor FM antenna cord (not  
supplied)  
Antenna cord  
3
NOTE  
• We recommend that you use coaxial cable for the FM antenna as it is  
well-shielded against interference.  
Turn the loop antenna until you have the best reception during  
AM broadcast program reception.  
NOTE  
• Make sure the antenna conductors do not touch any other terminals,  
connecting cords or power cords. This could cause poor reception.  
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Do not connect the power cord until all other connections have been made.  
Connections  
2
Connecting the satellite (front,  
center, surround) speakers  
Red  
Clear  
7 Assembling the front speakers  
Black striped  
Black  
7 Connecting the center and surround speakers  
Front speaker (SP-THC90F) (2)  
Base plate (2)  
Before assembling —  
• Prepare a Phillips screwdriver (not supplied).  
Take care not to drop any component part while assembling;  
otherwise, it may cause damage to the floor or injury.  
Center speaker  
(SP-THC90C) (1)  
Surround speaker  
(SP-THC90S) (2)  
1
Speaker  
Base plate  
Screw M4 x 30 mm  
(supplied)  
Clear  
Red  
Direction of the base plate:  
Make the short side front when fixing the base plate.  
Black striped  
Black  
Speaker (front side)  
To remove the speaker grilles:  
The speaker grilles of the satellite speakers are removable.  
The following procedure explains the removal of SP-THC90Ss  
speaker grille. You can remove speaker grilles of other speakers by  
the same procedure.  
Holes  
Projections  
CAUTION  
• NEVER insert your finger in between the speaker and the base plate,  
as it may get hurt.  
Speaker grille  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Do not connect the power cord until all other connections have been made.  
Connections  
7 Connecting the satellite speakers to the subwoofer  
Before connecting the speaker cords;  
Twist and pull the insulation coat off and  
remove.  
Powered subwoofer  
SP-PWC90  
Speaker cord  
• Connect the black striped cords to the black (r) terminals.  
• Connect the clear cords to the (q) terminals referring to the table  
below:  
FRONT SPEAKERS (LEFT)  
FRONT SPEAKERS (RIGHT)  
CENTER SPEAKER  
White  
Red  
Green  
Blue  
SURROUND SPEAKERS (LEFT)  
SURROUND SPEAKERS (RIGHT)  
Gray  
Surround speakers  
SP-THC90S  
Front speakers  
SP-THC90F  
Center speaker  
SP-THC90C  
Precautions for daily use  
CAUTION  
• When moving the speakers, do not pull the speaker cords;  
otherwise, the speakers may fall over, causing damage or injury.  
• Do not reproduce sounds at so high a volume that the sound is  
distorted; otherwise, the speakers may be damaged by internal  
heat buildup.  
• If you connect speakers other than the supplied ones, use speakers of  
the same speaker impedance (SPEAKER IMPEDANCE) indicated  
near the speaker terminals on the rear of the powered subwoofer.  
• DO NOT connect more than one speaker to one speaker terminal.  
• When installing the surround speakers on the wall;  
• When holding a speaker, always grasp the lower portion.  
• Do not lean against the speakers, as the speakers could fall down  
or break, possibly causing an injury. Especially be careful that  
children do not lean against them.  
– Be sure to have them installed on the wall by qualified personnel.  
DO NOT install the satellite speakers on the wall by yourself to  
avoid unexpected damage from falling off the wall due to incorrect  
installation or weakness in wall structure.  
– Care must be taken in selecting a location for speaker installation  
on a wall. Injury to personnel or damage to equipment may result  
if the speakers installed interfere with daily activities.  
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Do not connect the power cord until all other connections have been made.  
Connections  
Speaker layout  
To obtain the best possible sound from this system, you need to  
place all the speakers except the subwoofer at the same distance  
from the listening position.  
Connecting a TV  
You can get better picture quality in the order — Component  
video > S-video > Composite video.  
• Distortion of picture may occur when connecting to the TV via a  
VCR, or to a TV with a built-in VCR.  
You need to set “MONITOR TYPE” in the PICTURE menu  
correctly according to the aspect ratio of your TV. (See page 36.)  
Center speaker  
Front left  
speaker  
Front right  
speaker  
7 To connect a TV equipped with the component video input  
Powered  
subwoofer  
jacks  
If your TV supports progressive video input, you can enjoy a high  
quality picture by setting the progressive scan mode to active. (See  
page 18.)  
Center unit  
TV  
To component  
video input  
Surround left  
speaker  
Surround right  
speaker  
Component video cord (not supplied)  
If your speakers cannot be placed at the same distance from the  
listening position  
You can adjust the delay time of the speakers. See “Delay menu  
(DELAY)” on page 36.  
NOTE  
• If the component video input jacks of your TV are of the BNC type,  
use a plug adapter (not supplied) to convert the pin plugs to BNC  
plugs.  
• The component video signals can be output only when you select  
DVD or USB MEMORY as the source to play. (See page 17.)  
NOTE  
• Place the satellite speakers on a flat and level surface.  
• The front and center speakers are magnetically shielded to avoid color  
distortions on TVs. However, if not installed properly, they may cause  
color distortions. So, pay attention to the following when installing  
the speakers.  
– When placing the speakers near a TV set, turn off the TV’s main  
power switch or unplug it before installing the speakers. Then wait  
at least 30 minutes before turning on the TV’s main power switch  
again.  
7 To connect a TV equipped with the composite or S-video jacks  
Center unit  
Composite video cord (supplied)  
or  
Some TVs may still be affected even though you have followed the  
above. If this happens, move the speakers away from the TV.  
• The surround speakers are not magnetically shielded.  
If they are located nearby the TV or monitor, it will probably cause  
color distortion on the screen. To avoid this, do not place the speakers  
nearby the TV or monitor.  
S-video cord  
(not supplied)  
Align the 5 marks.  
To S-video input  
To composite  
video input  
• Be sure to place the powered subwoofer to the TV’s right. If you place  
the powered subwoofer to the TV’s left, keep sufficient distance  
between them to prevent the TV screen from appearing mottled.  
TV  
NOTE  
• Select the appropriate scan mode according to your TV. (See page 18.)  
11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Do not connect the power cord until all other connections have been made.  
Connections  
Connecting the powered  
subwoofer  
Connecting a cassette recorder  
You can enjoy playing tape and also recording tracks/files from this  
system.  
Powered  
subwoofer  
Center unit  
System cord  
Center unit  
(supplied)  
RCA pin plug cord  
(not supplied)  
Align the 5 marks.  
Align the 5 marks.  
RCA pin plug cord  
(not supplied)  
Connecting to an analog  
component  
To audio output  
To audio input  
You can enjoy the sound of an analog component.  
Cassette recorder  
Center unit  
NOTE  
• The surround mode takes effect for the signals output from the TAPE  
OUT jacks. When recording to a tape, set the surround mode to  
“OFF”. (See page 24.)  
S-video cord  
(not supplied)  
RCA pin plug  
cord  
or  
Connecting to a digital  
component  
(not supplied)  
Composite video  
cord  
(not supplied)  
You can enjoy the sound of a digital component.  
1
2
3
Center unit  
VCR (1 3 or 2 3)  
TV (3)  
Cassette recorder (3)  
To digital optical output  
DBS* tuner  
MD player  
1 To composite video output  
2 To S-video output  
3 To audio output  
Digital optical cord (not supplied)  
NOTE  
• The signals input to the VIDEO jack of the VCR IN jacks will be  
output only from the VIDEO jack of the VIDEO OUT jacks, not from  
the S-VIDEO jack of the VIDEO OUT jacks.  
* DBS = Direct Broadcasting Satellite  
NOTE  
• Only digital audio signals can be input when selecting “DBS” as the  
source to play. (See page 17.) When connecting a video component  
such as a DBS tuner, operate this system to listen to the sound.  
12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Do not connect the power cord until all other connections have been made.  
Connections  
Connecting a USB mass storage  
class device  
Connecting the power cord  
Make sure that all other connections have been completed.  
You can connect a USB mass storage class device such as a USB  
flash memory device, hard disc drive, multimedia card reader,  
digital camera, etc. to this system.  
Center unit  
Powered  
subwoofer  
• After connecting a USB mass storage class device to this system  
and selecting USB MEMORY as the source, the file control  
display appears on the TV screen. (See page 28.)  
USB cable (not supplied)  
Center unit (on the  
front panel)  
Power cord  
(supplied)  
Power cord  
Plug into AC outlets.  
NOTE  
• When connecting a USB mass storage class device, refer also to its  
manual.  
• Connect one USB mass storage class device to the system at a time. Do  
not use a USB hub.  
• You cannot charge the USB mass storage class device while  
connecting it to the USB MEMORY jack.  
CAUTION  
• Disconnect the power cord before cleaning or moving the system.  
• Do not pull on the power cord to unplug the cord. When unplugging  
the cord, always grasp and pull the plug so as not to damage the cord.  
• While playing back a file in a USB mass storage class device, do not  
disconnect the device. It may cause a malfunction of both the system  
and the device.  
• JVC bears no responsibility for any loss of data in the USB mass  
storage class device while using this system.  
• When connecting with a USB cable, use a cable less than 1 m in  
length.  
• This system is compatible with the USB 2.0 Full-Speed (not  
compatible with the USB 1.1).  
• You can play back the following types of files in a USB mass storage  
class device (maximum data transfer rate: 2 Mbps):  
– Music: MP3, WMA  
– Picture: JPEG  
– Movie: MPEG-4 (ASF), DivX (maximum frame rate of 30 fps for  
progressive)  
• You cannot play back a file larger than 2 GB.  
• When playing a file which has a large transfer rate, frames or sounds  
may be dropped during playback.  
• This system cannot recognize a USB mass storage class device whose  
rating exceeds 5 V/500 mA.  
• This system may not recognize some USB mass storage class devices.  
• This system may not play back some files even though their formats  
are listed above.  
.
13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Operating external components with the remote control  
The buttons described below are used on pages 14 and 15.  
Operating the TV  
7 To set the manufacturer’s code  
1 Slide the remote control mode selector  
to TV.  
2 Press and hold F TV.  
Keep the button pressed until step 4 is finished.  
3 Press ENTER.  
Number  
buttons  
4 Press number buttons (1-9, 0) to enter  
the manufacturers code (2 digits).  
Examples:  
For a Hitachi TV: Press 1, then 0.  
For a Toshiba TV: Press 0, then 8.  
Remote  
control mode  
selector  
Manufacturer  
JVC  
Code Manufacturer  
Code  
12  
01*  
10  
Samsung  
Sanyo  
Sharp  
Hitachi  
13, 14  
06  
Magnavox  
Mitsubishi  
Panasonic  
Philips  
02  
03  
Sony  
07  
04, 11 Toshiba  
08  
15  
05  
Zenith  
09  
RCA  
* “01” is the initial setting.  
(play button)  
5 Release F TV.  
If there is more than one code listed for corresponding brand,  
try each one until you enter the correct one.  
NOTE  
7 Operation  
• Manufacturers’ codes are subject to change without notice.  
• Set the codes again after replacing the batteries of the remote control.  
Aim the remote control at the TV.  
IMPORTANT  
Before using the remote control to operate a TV;  
• Set the remote control mode selector to TV.  
The following buttons are available:  
F TV:  
Turns TV on and off.  
Adjusts the volume.  
Selects the input mode (either TV or  
VIDEO).  
Changes the channels.  
TV VOL +/–:  
TV/VIDEO:  
CH +/–:  
1-10, 0, h10 (100+): Selects the channel.  
TV RETURN:  
Alternates between the previously selected  
channel and the current channel.  
NOTE  
• The operating buttons may differ depending on manufacturers.  
14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
See page 14 for button locations.  
Operating external components with the remote control  
Operating the DBS tuner or  
CATV converter  
Operating the VCR  
7 To set the manufacturer’s code  
7 To set the manufacturer’s code  
1 Slide the remote control mode selector  
to VCR/DBS.  
1 Slide the remote control mode selector  
to VCR/DBS.  
2 Press VCR.  
2 Press DBS.  
3 Press and hold F VCR/DBS.  
Keep the button pressed until step 5 is finished.  
3 Press and hold F VCR/DBS.  
Keep the button pressed until step 5 is finished.  
4 Press ENTER.  
4 Press ENTER.  
5 Press number buttons (1-9, 0) to enter  
the manufacturers code (2 digits).  
Examples:  
5 Press number buttons (1-9, 0) to enter  
the manufacturers code (2 digits).  
Examples:  
For a Philips VCR: Press 0, then 9.  
For an NEC VCR: Press 2, then 5.  
For a GI Jerrold product: Press 0, then 1.  
For a Sony product: Press 2, then 0.  
Manufacturer  
JVC  
Code  
Manufacturer  
Philips  
Code  
09  
01*, 02, 03  
11, 26  
29  
Manufacturer  
Echostar  
GI Jerrold  
Hamlin  
Code  
Emerson  
Fisher  
RCA  
05, 06  
24  
21  
Samsung  
01*, 02, 03, 04, 05, 06, 07, 08  
Funai  
10, 14, 15, 16 Sanyo  
21, 22, 23  
27, 28  
30  
15, 16, 17, 18  
13, 14  
19  
Gold Star  
Hitachi  
12  
Sharp  
Pioneer  
04  
Shintom  
Sony  
RCA  
Mitsubishi  
NEC  
13  
18, 19, 20  
08  
Scientific Atlanta  
Sony  
09, 10  
20  
25  
Zenith  
Panasonic  
07, 17  
Zenith  
11, 12  
* “01” is the initial setting.  
* “01” is the initial setting.  
6 Release F VCR/DBS.  
6 Release F VCR/DBS.  
If there is more than one code listed for your brand, try each  
one until you enter the correct one.  
If there is more than one code listed for your brand, try each  
one until you enter the correct one.  
7 Operation  
7 Operation  
Aim the remote control at the VCR.  
Aim the remote control at the DBS tuner or CATV converter.  
IMPORTANT  
IMPORTANT  
Before using the remote control to operate a  
VCR;  
Before using the remote control to operate a  
DBS tuner or CATV converter;  
1
Set the remote control mode selector  
to VCR/DBS.  
1
Set the remote control mode selector  
to VCR/DBS.  
2
Press VCR.  
2
Press DBS.  
The following buttons are available:  
The following buttons are available:  
F VCR/DBS:  
Turns VCR on and off.  
F VCR/DBS:  
Turns DBS tuner or CATV converter on and  
3 (play button):  
Starts playback.  
off.  
7:  
8:  
Stops operation.  
CH +/–:  
Changes the channels.  
Pauses playback.  
Fast forwards video tape.  
Rewinds video tape.  
Press this button together with 3 (play  
button) to start recording or together with 8  
to pause recording.  
1-10, 0, h10 (100+): Selects the channel.  
y
:
1:  
REC:  
CH +/–:  
Changes the TV channels on the VCR.  
NOTE  
• When operating a VCR or DBS tuner/CATV converter;  
– The source setting of VCR or DBS remains after you have changed  
the remote control mode selector to AUDIO or TV. When operating  
VCR or DBS tuner/CATV converter again, it is not necessary to  
press VCR or DBS after setting the remote control mode selector.  
15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic operations  
The buttons on the remote control are used to explain most of the  
operations in this manual. You can use the buttons on the center  
unit same as on the remote control for operations unless  
otherwise noted.  
Turning the system on/off  
On the remote control:  
Press FAUDIO.  
On the center unit:  
IMPORTANT  
Before using the remote control for the following  
operation;  
Press F.  
When DVD or USB MEMORY is selected as the source (see page  
17), the following messages will appear on the TV screen.  
• Set the remote control mode selector to AUDIO.  
The buttons described below are used on pages 16 to 18.  
Source  
selecting  
buttons  
• “OPEN”/“CLOSE”:  
Appears when opening or closing the disc tray.  
• “NOW READING”:  
Appears when the system is reading the disc/file information.  
• “REGION CODE ERROR!”:  
Appears when the Region Code of the DVD VIDEO does not  
match the code the system supports. The disc cannot be  
played back.  
• “NO DISC”:  
Remote  
control mode  
selector  
Appears when no disc is loaded.  
• “NO USB DEVICE”:  
Appears when no USB mass storage class device is connected.  
• “CANNOT PLAY THIS DISC”:  
Appears when unplayable disc is loaded.  
• “CANNOT PLAY THIS DEVICE”:  
Appears when unplayable USB mass storage class device is  
connected.  
Cursor  
(3/2)/  
ENTER  
NOTE  
• The STANDBY lamp on the center unit lights red when the power is  
turned off. The lamp goes off when the power is turned on.  
• The power supply to the subwoofer is linked to the center unit. The  
POWER ON lamp on the subwoofer lights green when the power is  
turned on.  
• A small amount of power is consumed even when the power is turned  
off (center unit only). This is called standby mode and the STANDBY  
lamp lights in this mode. Unplug the power cord from the AC outlet  
to turn the power off completely.  
• You can also turn on the system by pressing the following buttons:  
– One of the DISC (1-5) buttons (with SHIFT pressed) on the remote  
control  
– One of the DISC (1-5) 0 buttons on the center unit  
– One of the source selecting buttons or 3 on the remote control  
– One of the DISC (1-5) 3 buttons or 3 on the center unit  
STANDBY lamp  
16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
See page 16 for button locations.  
Basic operations  
Selecting the source to play  
Listening with headphones  
(not supplied)  
On the remote control:  
Press one of the source selecting buttons  
(DVD, USB MEMORY, FM/AM, VCR, DBS or  
CAUTION  
Be sure to turn down the volume;  
• Before connecting or putting on headphones as high volume may  
damage both the headphones and your hearing.  
• Before disconnecting headphones as high volume may be suddenly  
output from the speakers.  
TAPE).  
DVD:  
To play back a disc (DVD VIDEO, VCD etc.). (See page 19.)  
USB MEMORY:  
To play back a file in a USB mass storage class device. (See “To play  
a file in a USB mass storage class device” on page 19.)  
While connecting a pair of headphones to the PHONES jack on the  
center unit, the system automatically cancels the surround mode  
(see page 24) currently selected, deactivates the speakers, turns the  
subwoofer’s power off, and activates the headphone mode.  
“H. PHONE” appears on the display window.  
FM/AM:  
To tune in an FM or AM station. (See page 37.) Each time you press  
the button, the band alternates between FM and AM.  
VCR:  
Headphone mode  
When using the headphones, the following signals are output  
regardless of your speaker setting;  
To select the source from a component connected to the VCR IN  
jacks and AUX IN (VCR) jacks. (See page 12.)  
• For 2 channel sources, the front left and right channel signals are  
output from the headphones.  
• Multi-channel signals are down-mixed and output from the  
headphones.  
• (For DVD AUDIO) When the disc prohibits down-mixing, only  
the front left and right channels are output from the headphones.  
DBS:  
To select the source from a component connected to the DIGITAL  
IN (DBS) jack. (See page 12.)  
TAPE:  
To select the source from a component connected to the TAPE IN  
jacks. (See page 12.)  
On the center unit:  
Turning off the sound  
temporarily [MUTING]  
Press MUTING.  
Press SOURCE repeatedly until the source  
name you want appears on the display  
window.  
NOTE  
To restore the sound  
Perform one of the following:  
• Press MUTING again.  
• When AM, FM, DBS or TAPE is selected, this system does not output  
video signals.  
• It may take time to change the source.  
• Press VOL +/– (or turn VOLUME on the center unit).  
Adjusting the volume  
[VOLUME]  
Adjusting the brightness of the  
indications [DIMMER]  
CAUTION  
Press DIMMER.  
• Always set the volume to minimum level before starting any source.  
If the volume is set at a high level, the sudden blast of sound could  
permanently damage your hearing and/or blow out the speakers.  
Each time you press the button, you can change the brightness level  
in 3 steps.  
On the remote control:  
Press VOL +/–.  
On the center unit:  
Turn VOLUME.  
To increase the volume, turn VOLUME clockwise.  
To decrease the volume, turn VOLUME counterclockwise.  
17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
See page 16 for button locations.  
Basic operations  
Sleep Timer [SLEEP]  
Adjusting the sound  
The system turns off automatically when the specified period of  
1 Press TREBLE/BASS to show “TRE” or  
time has passed.  
“BASS” on the display window.  
Press SLEEP.  
Each time you press the button, the indication alternates  
between “TRE” and “BASS.  
Each time you press the button, the shut-off time changes as  
follows:  
• TRE: Select this to adjust treble sound.  
• BASS: Select this to adjust bass sound.  
– – (off) Z 10 Z 20 Z 30 Z 60 Z 90 Z 120 Z 150 Z  
(back to the beginning)  
(Unit: min.)  
2 Press LEVEL +/– to adjust the level from  
Example:  
– 10 to +10 (in 2 steps).  
minutes  
NOTE  
• The adjustments take effect for all sources.  
Changing the scan mode  
The system can be accommodated to your TVs scan mode.  
To check the remaining time  
Press SLEEP once.  
To change the remaining time  
Press SLEEP repeatedly.  
NOTE  
• To use the system in the progressive mode, it is required that the  
center unit is connected to the TV by using a component video cord  
(not supplied). (See page 11.)  
To cancel  
Press SLEEP repeatedly until “SLEEP – –” appears.  
Turning off the power also cancels the Sleep Timer.  
7 While DVD or USB MEMORY is selected as the source and  
1 stPoprpeedss and hold SCAN MODE for  
Adjusting the output level of  
the subwoofer and speakers  
2 seconds.  
Currently selected scan mode appears on the display window.  
2 Press Cursor 3/2 to select the desired  
1 Press SPK LEVEL to show the target  
speaker indication on the display  
window.  
mode.  
NT. 480I: Select when your TV supports the NTSC  
interlaced video input only.  
NT. 480P: Select when your TV equipped with component  
jacks supports the NTSC progressive video input.  
PAL. 576I: Select when your TV supports the PAL interlaced  
video input only.  
Each time you press the button, the indication of the speakers  
changes as follows:  
FRNT L (Front Left speaker) Z FRNT R (Front Right  
speaker) Z CENTER (Center speaker) Z SURR L  
(Surround Left speaker) Z SURR R (Surround Right  
speaker) Z SUBWFR (Subwoofer) Z (back to the  
beginning)  
PAL. 576P: Select when your TV equipped with component  
jacks supports the PAL progressive video input.  
You can get better picture quality in the progressive mode  
(“NT. 480P” or “PAL. 576P”) than in the interlace mode  
(“NT. 480I” or “PAL. 576I”).  
2 Press LEVEL +/– to adjust the output  
level from –6 to +6.  
3 Press ENTER while the selected mode is  
NOTE  
displayed.  
When the progressive mode is selected, the PROGRESSIVE  
indicator lights on the display window.  
• You can also make adjustments by using the setup menu shown on  
the TV screen. (See page 36.)  
• The adjustments take effect for all sources other than FM/AM. For  
FM/AM, adjust the level separately by repeating the procedure above.  
NOTE  
• Changing the scan mode does not take effect when connecting the TV  
with the S-video or the composite video cord.  
• Although the picture may be distorted when you press ENTER, this is  
not a malfunction of the system.  
• There are some progressive TVs and High-Definition TVs that are  
not fully compatible with this system, resulting in an unnatural  
picture when playing back a DVD VIDEO in the progressive scan  
mode. In such a case, change the scan mode to the interlace mode.  
• All JVC progressive TVs and High-Definition TVs are fully  
compatible with this system.  
18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Playback  
• The icon such as  
shows the disc formats or file types the  
operation is available for.  
Basic playback  
IMPORTANT  
Before using the remote control for the  
following operation;  
7 To play a disc  
1 Press the desired DISC (1-5)  
1
Set the remote control mode selector  
0 on the center unit.  
to AUDIO.  
2
Press DVD or USB MEMORY.  
The system turns on and the disc tray comes  
out.  
The buttons described below are used on pages 19 to 23.  
2 Place a disc.  
Label side up  
When placing an 8 cm disc  
3 Press DISC (1-5), with SHIFT pressed.  
NOTE  
• Up to 5 discs can be loaded.  
Number  
buttons  
• You can also start playback by pressing the following buttons:  
DVD or 3 (play button) on the remote control  
DISC (1-5) 3 or 3 on the center unit  
Remote  
control mode  
selector  
• The system plays back available discs sequentially until you stop  
playback or until the disc loaded on the DISC 5 tray reaches to the  
end. However, when DVD VIDEO or DVD AUDIO is loaded in the  
system, playback of the disc next to the DVD VIDEO or DVD  
AUDIO will not start.  
Cursor  
(3/2/Y/5)/  
ENTER  
7 To play a file in a USB mass storage class device  
Press USB MEMORY.  
The operations of the files in a USB mass storage class device  
depend on the file types stored in the device.  
• For details on connecting a USB mass storage class device, see  
“Connecting a USB mass storage class device. (See page 13.)  
(play button)  
7 When playing the following files...  
For MP3/WMA files  
The file control display (see page 28) appears on the TV screen.  
For JPEG files  
Each file (still pictures) is shown on the TV screen for about 3  
seconds (slide-show). When stopping playback, the file control  
display (see page 28) appears on the TV screen.  
For ASF/MPEG-2/MPEG-1 files  
Pressing TOP MENU/PG or MENU/PL shows the file control  
display (see page 28) on the TV screen during playback.  
For DivX files  
During the readout time, “READING INDEX” may appear on  
the TV screen.  
Pressing TOP MENU/PG or MENU/PL shows the file control  
display (see page 28) on the TV screen during playback.  
NOTE  
• When several types of files are recorded on a disc/device, select  
appropriate file type on the setup menu. (See page 36.)  
• (For JPEG) The system cannot accept operations even though you  
press any buttons before the entire picture appears on the TV screen.  
7 To pause playback  
Press 8.  
To continue playback, press 3 (play button).  
7 To stop  
Press 7.  
19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
See page 19 for button locations.  
Playback  
VCD/SVCD/CD  
Example: When a CD is played back  
7 On-screen guide icons  
During DVD VIDEO playback, the following guide icons may  
appear for a while on the TV screen;  
Signal and speaker  
indicators  
Track number  
: appears at the beginning of a scene containing multi-subtitle  
languages.  
: appears at the beginning of a scene containing multi-audio  
languages.  
: appears at the beginning of a scene containing multi-angle  
views.  
(Play),  
fast-reverse),  
Elapsed playing time (hour:minute:second)  
(Pause),  
/
(Fast forward/  
/
(Slow-motion forward/  
NOTE  
reverse): appears when you perform each operation.  
• When a VCD or SVCD with PBC function is played, the elapsed  
playing time does not appear, but “PBC” appears.  
: the disc cannot accept an operation you have tried to do.  
NOTE  
MP3/WMA file  
Example: When an MP3 file is played back  
• If you do not want the on-screen guide icons to appear, see page 37.  
Signal and speaker  
7 Playback information on the display window  
Track number  
indicators  
DVD VIDEO  
Example: When a DVD VIDEO encoded with Dolby Digital 5.1 ch  
is played  
Elapsed playing time  
(hour:minute:second)  
MP3 indicator*  
Elapsed playing time (hour:minute:second)  
(during playback only)  
Chapter number  
Pressing FL DISPLAY  
Group number  
Signal and speaker indicators (See page 25.)  
Surround mode and digital signal format (See page 25.)  
Pressing FL DISPLAY  
Track number  
* WMA indicator lights for a WMA file.  
Title number  
Chapter number  
JPEG file  
Example: When slide-show is played back  
File number  
DVD AUDIO  
Signal and speaker indicators  
Pressing FL DISPLAY  
Track number  
Elapsed playing time  
(hour:minute:second)  
Group number  
File number  
Pressing FL DISPLAY  
Group number  
Track number  
Continued on the next page  
20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
See page 19 for button locations.  
Playback  
ASF/MPEG-2/MPEG-1/DivX file  
Example: When an ASF file is played  
7 Disc information on the display window  
The disc indicators on the display window show the current status  
of the corresponding disc tray.  
Track number  
Signal and speaker indicators  
Example: When the discs are loaded to disc trays 1, 2 and 5, and the  
disc in the disc tray 5 is selected.  
Currently selected disc  
number  
Elapsed playing time (hour:minute:second)  
(during playback only)  
Pressing FL DISPLAY  
Currently loaded disc number  
Group number  
Track number  
7 Screen saver  
An image may burn in on a TV screen if a static picture is displayed  
for a long time. To prevent this, the system automatically dims the  
screen if a static picture is displayed for over 5 minutes (the screen  
saver function).  
• Pressing any button will cancel the screen saver function.  
• If you do not want to use the screen saver function, see page 36.  
DVD VR disc  
Example: During playback on the Original program*  
Elapsed playing time  
Chapter number  
(hour:minute:second)  
One Touch Replay  
You can move back the playback position by 10 seconds  
from the current position.  
7 During playback  
Pressing FL DISPLAY  
Press  
.
Title number  
Chapter number  
NOTE  
• This function works in the same title.  
• This function is not available during the repeat playback.  
• This feature may not work for some discs.  
Example: During playback on the Playlist*  
Fast-forward/fast-reverse  
search  
Elapsed playing time  
(hour:minute:second)  
Chapter number  
7 During playback  
On the remote control:  
Press y or 1.  
Each time you press the button, the search  
speed changes (x2, x5, x10, x20, x60).  
Pressing FL DISPLAY  
To return to normal speed playback  
Press 3 (play button).  
Playlist number  
Chapter number  
On the center unit:  
Press and hold x or 4.  
Continuously pressing x or 4 increases the fast-forward/  
reverse search speed (x5, x20).  
* Pressing TOP MENU/PG or MENU/PL, you can change the play  
mode. (See page 23.)  
NOTE  
NOTE  
• When a DVD VIDEO, DVD VR, VCD, SVCD, or ASF/MPEG-2/  
MPEG-1/DivX is played back, no sound comes out during fast-  
forward/reverse search.  
• You can change the time information mode (except for MP3/WMA/  
ASF/MPEG-2/MPEG-1/DivX). (See page 26.)  
• You can also check the playback information on the TV screen. (See  
page 25.)  
• When a DVD AUDIO, CD, or MP3/WMA is played back, sound is  
intermittent and low during fast-forward/reverse search.  
• This feature may not work for some discs/files.  
• For MP3/WMA, the search speed is not shown.  
• The search speed for DivX is y 1, y 2, y 3 for forward search,  
and 11, 12 and 13 for reverse search.  
21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
See page 19 for button locations.  
Playback  
Skip to the beginning of a  
desired selection  
Skipping at about 5-minute  
intervals  
You can skip within the file at about 5-minute intervals.  
This is useful especially when you want to skip within a  
long file.  
7 Using x/4 buttons  
7 For DVD VIDEO/DVD VR (chapter): During  
7 During playback  
playback  
7 For VCD/SVCD (track): During playback  
without PBC function  
Press Cursor 3/2.  
Each time you press the button, the playback position skips to the  
beginning of the previous or next interval. Each interval is about  
5 minutes.  
7 For DVD AUDIO/CD/MP3/WMA/JPEG/  
ASF/MPEG-2/MPEG-1/DivX (track/file): During playback or  
while stopped  
Press x or 4 repeatedly.  
NOTE  
NOTE  
• Intervals are automatically assigned from the beginning of a file.  
• This feature is available only within the same file.  
• This feature may not work for some discs/files.  
• When playing back an MP3/WMA/JPEG/ASF/MPEG-2/MPEG-1/  
DivX file, you can make operations using the file control display. (See  
page 28.)  
• This feature may not work for some discs/files.  
Locating a desired title/group  
using number buttons  
7 Using number buttons on the remote control  
7 For DVD VIDEO/DVD VR (title, chapter):  
While stopped, the title number is selected.  
During playback, the chapter number is selected.  
7 For DVD AUDIO (track):  
7 During playback or while stopped  
1 Press TITLE/GROUP.  
“– –” is shown in the title/group display area  
in the display window.  
During playback or while stopped  
7 For VCD/SVCD (track):  
Example: During DVD VIDEO playback  
During playback or while stopped without PBC function  
7 For CD/MP3/WMA/JPEG/ASF/MPEG-2/MPEG-1/DivX  
(track/file):  
During playback or while stopped  
Press number buttons (0-10, h10) to  
2 While the display window shows “– –,  
use number buttons (0-10, h10) to  
enter the desired title or group  
select the desired number.  
• For details on using the number buttons, see “How to use the  
number buttons” below.  
number.  
How to use the number buttons  
The system starts playback from the first chapter/track/file of  
the selected title/group.  
• For details on using the number buttons, see “How to use the  
number buttons” on the left column.  
To select 3:  
Press 3.  
To select 10: Press 10.  
To select 14: Press h10, 1, then 4.  
To select 24: Press h10, 2, then 4.  
To select 40: Press h10, 4, then 0.  
To select 114: Press h10, h10, 1, 1, then 4.  
NOTE  
• When locating a title of a DVD VR disc, the PG or PL indicator may  
light on the display window.  
• This feature may not work for some discs/files.  
22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
See page 19 for button locations.  
Playback  
Playing back a bonus group  
Selecting the desired title/  
playlist from the control  
display  
Some DVD AUDIOs have a special group called “bonus  
group” whose contents are not open to the public. The  
bonus group is always assigned to the last group of a disc. To  
play back a bonus group, you have to enter the specific “key  
number” (a password). The way of getting the key number depends  
on the disc. After getting the key number, you can play back the  
bonus group by following the procedure below.  
7 During playback or while stopped  
DVD  
VR  
1 Press TOP MENU/PG or MENU/PL.  
The control display is shown on the TV screen, and the system  
starts playback of the first title/playlist.  
7 While the BONUS indicator lights up on the display window  
• The PLAY LIST is shown only when the playlist is on the  
DVD VR disc.  
1 Select the bonus group.  
For selecting the group, see “Locating a desired title/group  
using number buttons” described on page 22.  
The key number entry indication appears.  
TOP MENU/PG: shows the ORIGINAL PROGRAM.  
Example:  
On the TV  
On the display window  
*1: Title number  
2 Press number buttons (0-9) to enter the  
*2: Recording date  
key number, then press ENTER.  
When you enter the correct key number, playback starts and  
the BONUS indicator goes off.  
*3: Recording source (TV station, the input terminal of the  
recording equipment etc.)  
*4: Start time of recording  
*5: Title of the original program/playlist (The title may not be  
displayed depending on the recording equipment.)  
*6: Current title  
• If you enter a wrong number, reenter the correct number.  
To clear the key number entry  
Perform whichever one of the following:  
• Press 7.  
MENU/PL: shows the PLAY LIST.  
Example:  
• Open the disc tray.  
Turn off the system.  
NOTE  
• In Random Playback, tracks in the bonus group are not played back.  
*7: Playlist number  
*8: Creating date of playlists  
*9: Number of chapters  
*10: Total playing time  
*11: Current playlist  
2 Press Cursor Y/5 to select the desired  
title/playlist.  
The system starts playback of the selected title/playlist.  
To clear the control display  
Press ENTER.  
About the play mode on a DVD VR disc  
• Original program (ORIGINAL PROGRAM):  
The system can play back the original picture in the recorded  
order.  
• Playlist (PLAY LIST):  
The system can play back the playlist edited by the recording  
equipment.  
23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Advanced operations  
• The icon such as  
shows the disc formats or file types the  
operation is available for.  
Using the surround mode  
IMPORTANT  
Before using the remote control for the following  
operation;  
You can enjoy more realistic sound field than a stereo sound by  
using the surround mode.  
• Set the remote control mode selector to AUDIO.  
• There are exceptions in the operation mentioned  
above. In such a case, follow each instruction.  
7 Auto Surround (AUTO SUR)  
Used to reproduce the sound as it is recorded without any  
conversion (downmixing or simulation, etc.). For example, a  
multichannel source is automatically reproduced in multichannel  
audio.  
The buttons described below are used on pages 24 to 34.  
7 Dolby Surround  
Dolby Pro Logic II*  
1
Dolby Pro Logic II has a newly developed multichannel playback  
format to decode all 2 channel sources — stereo source and Dolby  
Surround encoded source — into a 5.1 channel.  
Dolby Pro Logic II has two modes — Movie mode and Music mode:  
• Pro Logic II Movie (MOVIE)  
Suitable for reproduction of Dolby Surround encoded sources  
Number  
buttons  
Remote  
controlmode  
selector  
bearing the mark  
• Pro Logic II Music (MUSIC)  
.
Suitable for reproduction of any 2 channel stereo music sources.  
1
Dolby Digital*  
Used to reproduce multichannel soundtracks of the software  
Cursor  
(3/2/Y/5)/  
ENTER  
encoded with Dolby Digital (  
).  
• There are other encoding formats of digital surround introduced  
by Dolby Laboratories, such as Dolby Digital EX.  
(play button)  
2
7 DTS Digital Surround*  
Used to reproduce multichannel soundtracks of the software  
encoded with DTS Digital Surround (  
).  
DTS Digital Surround (DTS) is another discrete multichannel  
digital audio format available on CD and DVD software.  
• There are other encoding formats of multi-channel digital  
surround introduced by Digital Theater Systems, Inc., such as  
DTS-ES, DTS 96/24.  
Available Surround modes for each input signal  
The marks show available surround modes.  
Mode Surround  
off  
Auto  
DTS Digital Linear Packed  
Dolby Surround  
DSP  
Surround  
Surround  
DTS  
PCM  
PCM  
3
3
3
3
Signal  
OFF  
AUTO SUR MOVIE* MUSIC* DOLBY D  
LPCM PPCM STADIUM* ALL ST*  
Dolby D  
(Multichannel)  
Dolby D  
(2 channel)  
DTS Digital Surround  
(Multichannel)  
DTS Digital Surround  
(2 channel)  
Linear/Packed PCM  
(Multichannel)  
Analog (VCR) or Linear/  
Packed PCM (2 channel)  
1
*
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. “Dolby, Pro Logic, MLP Lossless, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of  
Dolby Laboratories.  
“DTS” and “DTS Digital Surround” are registered trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc.  
You can select these modes by pressing SURROUND. (See page 25.)  
2
3
*
*
Continued on the next page  
24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
See page 24 for button locations.  
Advanced operations  
7 DSP  
7 When playing back digital multichannel software (except  
• STADIUM  
while OFF is selected)  
STADIUM mode adds clarity and spreads the sound, like in an  
outdoor stadium.  
• All Channel Stereo  
The appropriate multichannel surround mode (Dolby Digital, DTS  
Digital Surround or Linear/Packed PCM) is automatically selected.  
All Channel Stereo (ALL ST) mode can reproduce a larger stereo  
sound field using all the connected (and activated) speakers.  
All Channel Stereo can be used while reproducing 2 channel stereo  
source.  
7 When playing back a 2 channel source  
You can select either Dolby Pro Logic II (MOVIE/MUSIC) or the  
DSP mode.  
Press SURROUND repeatedly to select the  
Normal stereo sound  
All Channel Stereo  
desired mode.  
The surround mode is turned on and the current surround mode  
appears on the display window.  
Each time you press the button, the surround mode changes.  
For details on each mode, see Available Surround modes for each  
input signal”. (See page 24.)  
To turn off the surround mode  
7 Indicators on the display window  
Digital signal format indicators  
Press SURROUND repeatedly until “OFF”  
appears on the display window.  
PPCM:  
Lights when DVD AUDIO packed PCM signals  
comes in.  
Storing adjustments — auto memory  
When you turn the power off, the system memorizes the current  
surround mode. The memorized mode is automatically recalled  
when you turn the power on.  
LPCM:  
GD:  
C:  
Lights when Linear PCM signal comes in.  
Lights when Dolby Digital signals come in.  
Lights when DTS Digital (Surround) signals come  
in.  
NOTE  
No indication: No digital signal indicator lights when analog  
signals come in.  
• For a down-mixing prohibited DVD AUDIO disc, the system  
continues to output multi-channel signals with “MULTI CH” shown  
on the display window even if the surround mode is turned off during  
playback. On the other hand, the system outputs only the front left  
and right channel signals with “LR ONLY” shown on the display  
window when you start playback with the surround mode having  
been set to “OFF” or “H. PHONE”.  
Dolby Surround mode indicator  
GPLII:  
Lights when Dolby Pro Logic II mode is activated.  
Surround indicator  
SURR:  
Lights when the surround mode is activated.  
• For ASF, MPEG-2, MPEG-1 and DivX (except DivX version 6), the  
surround mode takes no effects.  
Source signal indicators, etc.  
Light to indicate the incoming signals.  
a: Lights when the left channel signal comes  
in.  
Using the on-screen bar  
You can check disc information and you can use some functions  
using the on-screen bar.  
b: Lights when the center channel signal comes in.  
c: Lights when the right channel signal comes in.  
d: Lights when the LFE channel signal comes in.  
g: Lights when the surround left channel signal comes in.  
i: Lights when the surround right channel signal comes in.  
h: Lights when the monaural surround channel signal or 2  
channel Dolby Surround signal comes in.  
SW (Subwoofer): Always lights.  
Showing the on-screen bar  
7 Whenever a disc is loaded  
Press ON SCREEN.  
Each time you press the button, the on-screen bar  
changes as follows on the TV screen.  
The channel with “ ” shows that the corresponding speakers are  
reproducing the channels’ sound.  
If the channels’ sound decoded into 5.1 channel is reproduced, only  
Example: During DVD VIDEO playback  
” lights.  
Selecting the surround mode  
The system is set up to automatically select the optimal surround  
mode for input signal from digital multichannel software.  
When playing back a 2 channel source, you can select the desired  
surround mode manually.  
OFF  
(The on-screen bar disappears)  
IMPORTANT  
Before using the remote control for the following  
operation;  
(back to the beginning)  
• Set the remote control mode selector to AUDIO.  
• The currently selected item shows green.  
25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
See page 24 for button locations.  
Advanced operations  
7 Shows playback status.  
: appears during playback.  
7 Contents of the on-screen bar during playback  
DVD VIDEO  
/
/
: appears during fast forward/reverse.  
: appears during playback in forward slow-motion/  
reverse slow-motion.  
: appears when paused.  
: appears when stopped.  
8 Select this to change time information (F). See “Changing the  
time information” below.  
DVD AUDIO  
9 Select this for Repeat Playback. (See page 33.)  
0 Select this for time search function. (See page 28.)  
K For DVD VIDEO and DVD VR: Select this for chapter search  
function. (See page 27.)  
For DVD AUDIO: Select this for track search function. (See page  
27.)  
L Select this to change audio language or channel. (See page 30.)  
M Select this to change subtitle language and subpicture. (See page  
29.)  
VCD  
N Select this to change view angle. (See page 29.)  
O Select this to change the page. (See page 31.)  
P Shows Playback mode status.  
PROGRAM: appears during Program Playback. (See page 32.)  
RANDOM: appears during Random Playback. (See page 33.)  
Q Shows Repeat mode status. (See page 33.)  
SVCD  
Changing the time information  
You can change the time information in the on-  
screen bar on the TV screen and the display  
window of the center unit.  
CD  
7 During playback  
1 Press ON SCREEN twice.  
The on-screen bar appears on the TV screen.  
2 Press Cursor 3/2 to highlight  
.
DVD VR disc  
3 Press ENTER repeatedly to select the  
desired information.  
Example: When elapsed playing time of disc is selected.  
ASF/MPEG-2/MPEG-1/DivX  
7 DVD VIDEO/DVD AUDIO/DVD VR  
• TIME: Elapsed playing time of current chapter/track  
• REM: Remaining time of current chapter/track  
• TOTAL: Elapsed time of Title/Group/Program  
T. REM: Remaining time of Title/Group/Program  
1 Shows disc type.  
7 VCD/SVCD/CD  
2 Shows audio information.  
• TIME: Elapsed playing time of current track  
• REM: Remaining time of current track  
• TOTAL: Elapsed time of disc  
3 Shows disc number.  
4 For DVD VIDEO: Shows current title number.  
For DVD AUDIO: Shows current group number.  
For DVD VR: Shows current play mode (PG: for Original  
program, PL: for Playlist) and title number.  
5 For DVD VIDEO and DVD VR: Shows current chapter number.  
For other type of discs: Shows current track number.  
6 Shows time information. See “Changing the time information”  
on the right column.  
T. REM: Remaining time of disc  
4 Press ON SCREEN.  
The on-screen bar disappears.  
NOTE  
• When playing back DVD VR, “TIME” and “REM” cannot be shown.  
26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
See page 24 for button locations.  
Advanced operations  
Locating a desired chapter/track using the on-  
screen bar  
Playing from a specified  
position on a disc  
You can start playing a title, chapter or track you specify. You can  
also play a disc from specified time.  
7 During playback  
1 Press ON SCREEN twice.  
The on-screen bar appears on the TV screen.  
Locating a desired scene from the DVD menu  
2 Press Cursor 3/2 to highlight  
/
.
DVD VIDEOs and DVD AUDIOs generally have their  
own menus which show disc contents and you can  
display them on the TV screen. You can locate a desired  
scene by using these menus.  
3 Press ENTER.  
Example: During DVD VIDEO playback  
7 Whenever a DVD VIDEO or DVD AUDIO is loaded  
1 Press TOP MENU/PG or MENU/PL.  
The menu appears on the TV screen.  
4 Press number buttons (0-9) to enter the  
desired chapter number.  
Example:  
Normally, a DVD VIDEO or DVD AUDIO which contains  
more than one title will have a “top” menu which lists the titles.  
Press TOP MENU/PG to show the title menu.  
Some discs may also have a different menu which is shown by  
pressing MENU/PL.  
See the instructions for each discs regarding its particular  
menu.  
To select 8:  
Press 8.  
To select 10: Press 1, then 0.  
To select 20: Press 2, then 0.  
To select 37: Press 3, then 7.  
To correct a misentry  
Repeat step 4.  
2 Use Cursor 3/2/Y/5 to select a  
desired item.  
5 Press ENTER.  
3 Press ENTER.  
• With some discs, you can also select items by entering the  
corresponding number using number buttons.  
6 Press ON SCREEN.  
The on-screen bar disappears.  
NOTE  
• You can select up to the 99th chapter/track.  
NOTE  
• This feature may not work for some discs.  
Locating a desired scene using a VCD/SVCD menu  
with PBC  
A VCD or SVCD recorded with PBC has its own menus  
such as a list of contained songs. You can locate a  
specific scene by using these menus.  
7 During playback with PBC function  
1 Press RETURN repeatedly until the  
menu appears on the TV screen.  
2 Press number buttons (1-10, h10) to  
select the number of the desired item.  
• For details on using the number buttons, see “How to use the  
number buttons. (See page 22.)  
To return to the menu  
Press RETURN repeatedly until the menu screen appears.  
When “NEXT” or “PREVIOUS” is shown on the TV screen:  
To go to the next page, press x.  
To return to the previous page, press 4.  
NOTE  
• If you want to play a PBC-compatible VCD/SVCD without using the  
PBC function, perform any of the following:  
– Start playback by pressing number buttons while stopped.  
– Press x repeatedly until the desired track number is displayed,  
then start playback by pressing 3 (play button). The track number  
appears on the display window instead of “PBC”.  
• To activate the PBC function when playing a PBC-compatible VCD/  
SVCD without using the PBC function, perform any of the following:  
– Press TOP MENU/PG or MENU/PL.  
– Press 7 twice to stop playback, then press 3 (play button).  
27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
See page 24 for button locations.  
Advanced operations  
Locating a desired position by specifying the time  
Using the file control display  
You can search and play desired groups and tracks/  
files using the file control display on the TV  
screen.  
7 For DVD VIDEO/DVD AUDIO/DVD VR:  
During playback  
7 For VCD/SVCD: While stopped or during  
playback without PBC function  
7 For CD: During playback or while stopped  
Example: When the source is DVD.  
1
Current group/total group  
number  
Playback mode* (PROGRAM,  
RANDOM, REPEAT)  
7 When specifying the elapsed playing time from the  
beginning of the disc  
Perform the following procedure while stopped.  
Track information (for MP3/  
WMA only)  
Elapsed playing time of current  
track (except for JPEG)  
7 When specifying the elapsed playing time from the  
beginning of the current title/track  
Perform the following procedure during playback.  
2
*
1 Press ON SCREEN twice.  
The on-screen bar appears on the TV screen.  
2 Press Cursor 3/2 to highlight  
3 Press ENTER.  
.
4 Use number buttons (0-9) to enter the  
time.  
Example: To play back from a point 2 (hours): 34 (minutes): 08  
Current group  
Current track (file)  
(seconds) elapsed  
Current track (file) / total track (file)  
number on current group  
Total track (file)  
number on disc  
Press 2  
Press 4  
Press 8  
Press 3  
Press 0  
Playback status  
1
2
*
(For JPEG/ASF/MPEG-2/MPEG-1/DivX) The Program and  
Random mode are not available.  
When the source is USB MEMORY, USB” appears.  
*
To cancel a misentry  
The file control display appears automatically during playback  
(MP3/WMA) or while stopped.  
Press Cursor 2 repeatedly.  
5 Press ENTER.  
7 For MP3/WMA: During playback or while stopped  
7 For JPEG/ASF/MPEG-2/MPEG-1/DivX: While stopped  
6 Press ON SCREEN.  
The on-screen bar disappears.  
1 Press Cursor 3/2/Y/5 to select the  
desired group/track/file.  
2 Press 3 (play button) or ENTER.  
• Track playback/slide-show starts from the selected track/file.  
• When you press ENTER for JPEG, only the selected file is  
played back.  
NOTE  
• (For MP3/WMA) During playback, you can change the playback  
track/file by pressing x/4 or Cursor 5/Y.  
• You can also check playback information on the display window. (See  
page 20.)  
• Some group, track and file names may not be displayed correctly  
depending on recording conditions.  
• The order of groups, tracks, and files may be displayed differently  
from the order displayed on your personal computer.  
28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
See page 24 for button locations.  
Advanced operations  
NOTE  
Resume Playback  
• During DVD AUDIO playback, this feature is available only for the  
video part.  
When Resume Playback is set to “ON” (see page  
37) and you stop playback by the following  
operations, the position where playback has been  
stopped is stored. (The RESUME indicator lights  
on the display window.)  
Selecting the subtitle  
7 During playback of a disc/file containing  
Turning off the power (See page 16.)  
• Pressing 7 once  
subtitles in several languages  
• Changing the source (See page 17.)  
When using the SUBTITLE button:  
To start playback from the stored position  
Press 3 (play button) or corresponding source button (DVD or USB  
MEMORY).  
• There may be a case when 3 (play button) does not work after  
changing the source. In this case, select DVD or USB MEMORY  
as a source.  
1 Press SUBTITLE.  
Example (DVD VIDEO): “ENGLISH” is selected out of 3  
subtitle languages recorded.  
• Pressing DISC (1-5) (with SHIFT pressed) on the remote control or  
DISC (1-5) 3 on the center unit also resumes disc playback.  
To clear the stored position  
Press 7 again.  
2 Press Cursor Y/5 to select the desired  
subtitle.  
• Opening the disc tray with the playback disc or disconnecting the  
USB mass storage class device also clears the stored position.  
For DVD VR  
• Pressing SUBTITLE activates the subtitles (subpictures)  
regardless of whether the subtitles are recorded or not.  
(Subpictures will not change if no subpicture is recorded.)  
NOTE  
• (For DivX) The beginning of a scene where playback has been  
stopped may be stored.  
For SVCD  
• An SVCD can contain up to four subtitles. Pressing SUBTITLE  
changes the subtitles regardless of whether the subtitles are  
recorded or not. (Subtitles will not change if no subtitle is  
recorded.)  
Selecting a view angle  
7 During playback of a disc containing multi-view  
angles  
When using the on-screen bar:  
1 Press ON SCREEN twice.  
When using the ANGLE button:  
The on-screen bar appears on the TV screen.  
1 Press ANGLE with SHIFT pressed.  
2 Press Cursor 3/2 to highlight  
3 Press ENTER.  
.
Example: The first view angle is selected out of 3 view angles  
recorded.  
4 Press Cursor Y/5 repeatedly to select  
2 Press ANGLE repeatedly with SHIFT  
pressed, or press Cursor Y/5 to select  
the desired view angle.  
the desired subtitle.  
5 Press ENTER.  
When using the on-screen bar:  
6 Press ON SCREEN.  
The on-screen bar disappears.  
1 Press ON SCREEN twice.  
The on-screen bar appears on the TV screen.  
NOTE  
• To clear the subtitle, press SUBTITLE. Each time you press SUBTITLE,  
subtitle appears and disappears alternately.  
2 Press Cursor 3/2 to highlight  
3 Press ENTER.  
.
• Some subtitle or audio languages are abbreviated in the pop-up  
window. See “The language codes list”. (See page 35.)  
• During DVD AUDIO playback, this feature is available only for the  
video part.  
• For DivX, you cannot operate this procedure using the on-screen bar.  
4 Press Cursor Y/5 to select the desired  
view angle.  
5 Press ENTER.  
6 Press ON SCREEN.  
The on-screen bar disappears.  
29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
See page 24 for button locations.  
Advanced operations  
Selecting the audio  
Special picture playback  
7 During playback of a disc/file containing audio  
Frame-by-frame playback  
in several languages  
7 During playback  
When using the AUDIO button:  
Press 8 repeatedly.  
Each time you press the button, the still  
picture advances by one frame.  
1 Press AUDIO.  
Example (DVD VIDEO): “ENGLISH” is selected out of 3 audio  
languages recorded.  
To return to normal playback  
Press 3 (play button).  
Playing back in slow-motion  
7 During playback  
2 Press AUDIO repeatedly or press Cursor  
Y/5 to select the desired audio.  
1 Press 8 at the point where  
you want to start playback  
When using the on-screen bar:  
in slow-motion from.  
1 Press ON SCREEN twice.  
The system pauses playback.  
The on-screen bar appears on the TV screen.  
2 Press SLOW 9.  
2 Press Cursor 3/2 to highlight  
3 Press ENTER.  
.
Playback in forward slow-motion starts.  
For DVD VIDEO/DVD AUDIO only:  
To play back in reverse slow-motion, press SLOW (.  
Each time you press the button, the playback speed becomes  
faster (1/32, 1/16, 1/8, 1/4, 1/2).  
Example: On the TV  
4 Press Cursor Y/5 to select the desired  
audio.  
5 Press ENTER.  
To return to normal playback  
Press 3 (play button).  
6 Press ON SCREEN.  
The on-screen bar disappears.  
NOTE  
• Sound cannot be heard during slow-motion playback.  
• During DVD AUDIO playback, this feature is available only for the  
video part.  
NOTE  
• Some subtitle or audio languages are abbreviated in the pop-up  
window. See “The language codes list”. (See page 35.)  
• “ST”, “L”, or “R” is displayed when playing a VCD respectively  
representing “stereo”, “left sound” and “right sound”.  
When playing a SVCD, “ST1”, “ST2”, “L1”, “R1”, “L2”, or “R2” is  
displayed.  
• For DivX, you cannot operate this procedure using the on-screen bar.  
30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
See page 24 for button locations.  
Advanced operations  
Selecting browsable still picture recorded on DVD  
AUDIO  
Most DVD AUDIOs include browsable still pictures (B.S.P.),  
which usually appear by turns automatically during  
playback according to the playback sequence. You can  
change the picture (turn the page) manually when the current  
group/track has selectable pictures (pages).  
Changing the VFP setting  
The VFP (Video Fine Processor) function enables  
you to adjust the picture character according to the  
type of programming, picture tone or personal  
preference.  
7 During playback  
1 Press VFP.  
7 During playback and while the B.S.P. indicator lights up on the  
The current VFP settings appear on the TV screen.  
display window  
Example:  
When using the PAGE button:  
Press PAGE repeatedly to select a desired  
still picture.  
When using the on-screen bar:  
1 Press ON SCREEN twice.  
The on-screen bar appears on the TV screen.  
2 Press Cursor 3/2 to highlight  
3 Press ENTER.  
.
2 Press Cursor 3/2 repeatedly to select  
the VFP mode.  
• NORMAL: Normally select this.  
• CINEMA: Suitable for movies.  
When you select “NORMALor “CINEMA, press VFP to  
complete the setting.  
• USER 1 and USER 2: You can adjust parameters that affect  
picture appearance.  
4 Press Cursor 5/Y to select the desired  
still picture.  
Only when selecting “USER 1” or “USER 2” in step 2, proceed  
to perform the following operation;  
5 Press ENTER.  
3 Press Cursor Y/5 repeatedly to select  
6 Press ON SCREEN.  
The on-screen bar disappears.  
a parameter you want to adjust.  
Adjust gradually and confirm picture appearance results are as  
preferred.  
Zooming in  
• GAMMA: Controls brightness of neutral tints while  
maintaining brightness of dark and bright portions (–3 to  
+3).  
7 During playback or while paused  
1 Press ZOOM with SHIFT  
pressed.  
• BRIGHTNESS: Controls screen brightness (–8 to +8).  
• CONTRAST: Controls screen contrast (–7 to +7).  
• SATURATION: Controls screen color depth (–7 to +7).  
• TINT: Controls screen tint (–7 to +7).  
Each time you press ZOOM with SHIFT  
pressed, scene magnification changes.  
• SHARPNESS: Controls screen sharpness (–8 to +8).  
2 While zoomed in, press Cursor 3/2/  
4 Press ENTER.  
Y/5 to move zoom-in area.  
Example:  
To return to normal playback  
Press ZOOM repeatedly with SHIFT pressed, to select ZOOM OFF.  
NOTE  
• The number of the magnification steps varies depending on the disc  
type.  
• During slide-show playback of JPEG, zooming in is not available. In  
such a case, press 8 to pause slide-show playback, then zoom in.  
• During DVD AUDIO playback, this feature is available only for the  
video part.  
5 Press Cursor Y/5 to change the  
setting.  
6 Press ENTER.  
The current VFP settings appear again.  
7 Repeat steps 3 to 6 to adjust other  
• During playback, there may be a case where Cursor (3/2/Y/5)  
does not work in step 2 above.  
parameters.  
8 Press VFP.  
NOTE  
• Although the setting display disappears in the middle of the  
procedure, the setting at that time will be stored.  
31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
See page 24 for button locations.  
Advanced operations  
3 Press 3 (play button).  
Program Playback  
7 While stopped  
If all of the programmed tracks/files have been played back,  
playback stops and the program window appears again. Note  
that program setting remains.  
1 Press PLAY MODE  
To check the program contents  
During playback, press 7. Playback stops and the program window  
repeatedly until program  
appears.  
window appears on the TV screen.  
To quit the Program mode  
The PRG indicator lights on the display window.  
While stopped, press PLAY MODE repeatedly until both program  
window and  
disappear from the TV screen.  
NOTE  
• When the source is USB MEMORY, Program Playback does not  
work.  
• There may be a case where bonus group on a DVD AUDIO cannot be  
played.  
• The Resume function cannot be used with Program Playback.  
DISC (1-5) on the remote control and DISC (1-5) 3 on the center unit  
do not work during Program Playback.  
• Program Playback may not work for some discs.  
2 Follow the instructions that appear on  
the TV screen to program the desired  
chapters/tracks.  
• For details on using the number buttons, see “How to use the  
number buttons. (See page 22.)  
• The contents numbers that you have to specify for  
programming varies depending on the disc/file type:  
– DVD VIDEO: Titles and chapters  
– VCD, SVCD, CD: Tracks  
– DVD AUDIO, MP3, WMA: Groups and tracks  
• Before you program the tracks in bonus group on a DVD  
AUDIO, perform the procedure of “Playing back a bonus  
group” (see page 23) to turn off the BONUS indicator on the  
display window.  
You can specify the chapters/tracks whose number is up to  
99.  
• There may be a case that the group or title number can be  
entered even for discs that contain no groups or titles. In such  
a case, press ENTER to proceed to the Track/Chapter column.  
• When you press ENTER instead of the number buttons in the  
Track/Chapter column, ALLappears and all the tracks or  
chapters on the selected group or title are programmed as a  
step.  
To clear the programs one by one from the last entered  
number  
Press CANCEL repeatedly.  
To clear all programs  
Press and hold CANCEL.  
You can also clear the program by turning off the system.  
32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
See page 24 for button locations.  
Advanced operations  
Display  
window  
TV screen  
Meanings  
Random Playback  
Repeats the current group for  
DVD AUDIO/MP3/WMA/  
JPEG/ASF/MPEG-2/MPEG-1/  
DivX.  
You can play titles or tracks on a disc in random  
order.  
REPEAT GROUP  
7 While stopped  
1 Press PLAY MODE repeatedly until  
Repeats the current title for  
DVD VIDEO.  
appears on the TV screen.  
(For DVD VR) Repeats the  
current title for Original  
program.  
The RND indicator lights on the display window.  
2 Press 3 (play button).  
• When more than one discs are loaded, the system starts  
Random Playback of the next disc after completing current  
disc playback.  
(For DVD VR) Repeats the  
current playlist for Playlist.  
Repeats all titles and tracks on  
the current disc for DVD VR/  
VCD/SVCD/CD/MP3/WMA/  
JPEG/ASF/MPEG-2/MPEG-1/  
DivX.  
To quit Random mode  
While stopped, press PLAY MODE repeatedly until both program  
REPEAT DISC  
DISC  
ALL  
window and  
disappear from the TV screen.  
You can also clear the Random mode by turning off the system.  
NOTE  
Repeats all the available discs/  
files.  
• When the source is USB MEMORY, Random Playback does not  
work.  
REPEAT ALL  
• The same title/track will not be played back more than once during  
Random Playback.  
,
Repeats the current track for  
DVD AUDIO/VCD/SVCD/  
CD/MP3/WMA/ASF/MPEG-  
2/MPEG-1/DivX.  
REPEAT TRACK,  
REPEAT STEP  
1
Repeat Playback  
Repeats the current chapter for  
DVD VIDEO/DVD VR.  
,
Repeating the current selection or all discs  
Repeat mode is off.  
The system plays back the disc/  
file normally.  
No  
indication  
7 For DVD VIDEO/DVD VR: During playback  
7 For VCD/SVCD: During playback without PBC  
function or while stopped  
7 For DVD AUDIO/CD/MP3/JPEG/ASF/  
MPEG-2/MPEG-1/DivX: During playback or  
while stopped  
NOTE  
• When DVD VIDEO or DVD AUDIO is loaded in the system,  
playback of the disc next to the DVD VIDEO or DVD AUDIO will  
/REPEAT ALL on the TV screen or  
ALL in the display window is shown.  
• For DVD VIDEO and DVD AUDIO, REPEAT ALL and REPEAT  
DISC may not be available depending on the disc.  
not start, although  
When using the REPEAT button:  
Press REPEAT.  
When using the on-screen bar (except for MP3/WMA/JPEG/  
ASF/MPEG-2/MPEG-1/DivX):  
1 Press ON SCREEN twice.  
Repeat mode indicator  
The on-screen bar appears on the TV screen.  
Each time you press REPEAT, the Repeat mode changes.  
2 Press Cursor 3/2 to highlight  
3 Press ENTER.  
.
4 Press Cursor Y/5 repeatedly to select  
the Repeat mode.  
5 Press ENTER.  
6 Press ON SCREEN.  
The on-screen bar disappears.  
To cancel Repeat Playback  
Select “OFF” in step 4.  
33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
See page 24 for button locations.  
Advanced operations  
Repeating a desired part [A-B Repeat]  
You can repeat playback of a desired part by  
specifying the beginning (point A) and ending  
(point B).  
Tray lock  
You can lock the tray and prohibit unwanted disc ejection.  
On the center unit ONLY:  
7 During playback  
7 While the system is turned off  
1 Press ON SCREEN twice.  
The on-screen bar appears on the TV screen.  
2 Press Cursor 3/2 to highlight  
3 Press ENTER.  
.
Press and hold  
• “LOCKED” appears on the display window.  
• If you try to eject the disc, “LOCKED” appears to indicate that  
the tray is locked.  
4 Press Cursor Y/5 repeatedly to select  
To cancel  
“A-B”.  
Carry out the same operation again.  
• “UNLOCKED” appears on the display window.  
5 Press ENTER at the beginning of the  
part you want to repeat (point A).  
Setting the sound balance  
The repeat mode indicator “  
window.  
” appears on the display  
IMPORTANT  
Before using the remote control for the following  
operation;  
• Set the remote control mode selector to AUDIO.  
6 Press ENTER at the end of the part you  
want to repeat (point B).  
The repeat mode indicator on the display window changes to  
NOTE  
” and A-B Repeat Playback starts.  
• Before you start operation; There is a time limit when  
doing the following steps. If the setting is canceled before you finish,  
1staPrtrfreomssstSepE1TagTaiInN. G.  
7 Press ON SCREEN.  
The on-screen bar disappears.  
To cancel  
Select “OFF” in step 4, then press ENTER.  
NOTE  
• When playing back a DVD VIDEO/DVD VR, A-B Repeat Playback is  
possible only within the same title.  
• “A-B” cannot be selected during Program and Random Playback.  
• “A-B” cannot be selected during playback with PBC function.  
2 Press Cursor 3/2 to make an  
adjustment or selection.  
You can adjust the balance of the sound between “R (right)  
–21” and “L (left) –21. To set the balance to normal, select  
“CNTR (center).  
The adjustment is set and the display automatically disappears  
a few seconds later.  
34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting DVD preferences  
NOTE  
Using the setup menus  
• See the following “The language codes list” for the code of each  
language, such as “AA”, etc.  
You can change the language used in the setup menus. See “Menu  
description” below.  
The language codes list  
Basic operation on the setup menus  
AA Afar  
IK Inupiak  
RN Kirundi  
IMPORTANT  
Before using the remote control for the  
following operation;  
AB Abkhazian  
AF Afrikaans  
AM Ameharic  
AR Arabic  
AS Assamese  
AY Aymara  
AZ Azerbaijani  
BA Bashkir  
BE Byelorussian  
BG Bulgarian  
BH Bihari  
BI Bislama  
BN Bengali, Bangla  
BO Tibetan  
BR Breton  
CA Catalan  
CO Corsican  
CS Czech  
IN Indonesian  
RO Rumanian  
RW Kinyarwanda  
SA Sanskrit  
SD Sindhi  
SG Sangho  
IS  
IW Hebrew  
JI Yiddish  
Icelandic  
1
Set the remote control mode selector  
to AUDIO.  
JW Javanese  
KA Georgian  
KK Kazakh  
KL Greenlandic  
KM Cambodian  
KN Kannada  
KO Korean (KOR)  
KS Kashmiri  
KU Kurdish  
2
Press DVD or USB MEMORY.  
SH Serbo-Croatian  
SI  
Singhalese  
SK Slovak  
SL Slovenian  
SM Samoan  
SN Shona  
SO Somali  
SQ Albanian  
SR Serbian  
SS Siswati  
ST Sesotho  
SU Sundanese  
SV Swedish  
SW Swahili  
TA Tamil  
Cursor  
(3/2/Y/5)/  
ENTER  
KY Kirghiz  
LA Latin  
LN Lingala  
LO Laothian  
LT Lithuanian  
LV Latvian, Lettish  
MG Malagasy  
MI Maori  
MK Macedonian  
ML Malayalam  
MN Mongolian  
MO Moldavian  
MR Marathi  
MS Malay (MAY)  
MT Maltese  
MY Burmese  
NA Nauru  
NE Nepali  
NL Dutch  
NO Norwegian  
OC Occitan  
OM (Afan) Oromo  
OR Oriya  
PA Panjabi  
PL Polish  
PS Pashto, Pushto  
PT Portuguese  
QU Quechua  
RM Rhaeto-Romance  
7 While stopped  
CY Welsh  
1 Press SET UP.  
DA Danish  
DZ Bhutani  
EL Greek  
EO Esperanto  
ET Estonian  
EU Basque  
FA Persian  
FI Finnish  
FJ Fiji  
FO Faroese  
FY Frisian  
GA Irish  
GD Scots Gaelic  
GL Galician  
GN Guarani  
GU Gujarati  
HA Hausa  
TE Telugu  
TG Tajik  
TH Thai  
TI Tigrinya  
TK Turkmen  
TL Tagalog  
TN Setswana  
TO Tonga  
TR Turkish  
TS Tsonga  
TT Tatar  
TW Twi  
UK Ukrainian  
UR Urdu  
UZ Uzbek  
VI Vietnamese  
VO Volapuk  
WO Wolof  
XH Xhosa  
YO Yoruba  
ZU Zulu  
2 Follow the instructions that appear on  
the TV screen.  
Menu description  
: Language menu (LANGUAGE)  
HI Hindi  
HR Croatian  
HU Hungarian  
HY Armenian  
IA Interlingua  
IE Interlingue  
7 MENU LANGUAGE  
Some DVDs have their own menus in multiple languages.  
• Select the initial language*.  
7 AUDIO LANGUAGE  
Some DVDs have multiple audio languages.  
• Select the initial audio language*.  
7 SUBTITLE  
Some DVDs have multiple subtitle languages.  
• Select the initial subtitle language*.  
7 ON SCREEN LANGUAGE  
Select the language shown on the TV screen when operating this  
system.  
* When the language you have selected is not recorded to a disc,  
the original language is automatically used as the initial language.  
35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting DVD preferences  
: Picture menu (PICTURE)  
: Audio menu (AUDIO)  
7 D. RANGE COMPRESSION  
7 MONITOR TYPE  
(Dynamic range compression)  
You can select the monitor type to match your TV when you play  
DVDs recorded in the picture’s height/width ratio of 16:9.  
16:9/16:9 MULTI (Wide television conversion)  
Select this when the aspect ratio of your TV is fixed on 16:9 (wide  
TV).  
You can enjoy low level recorded sound clearly at night even at a low  
volume when listening to the sound with Dolby Digital.  
• AUTO  
Select this when you want to enjoy surround sound with its full  
dynamic range (no effect applied).  
• ON  
When you play DVDs recorded in the pictures height/width ratio  
of 4:3, the system adjust the ratio of output signal automatically.  
4:3 LB/4:3 MULTI LB (Letter Box conversion)  
Select this when the aspect ratio of your TV is 4:3 (conventional  
TV). While viewing a wide screen picture, the black bars appear  
on the top and the bottom of the screen.  
4:3 PS/4:3 MULTI PS (Pan Scan conversion)  
Select this when the aspect ratio of your TV is 4:3 (conventional  
TV). While viewing a wide screen picture, the black bars do not  
appear, however, the left and right edges of the pictures will not  
be shown on the screen.  
Select this when you want to fully apply the compression effect  
(useful at midnight).  
NOTE  
• When you play a multichannel Dolby Digital source with the  
surround mode is off, the setting of D. RANGE COMPRESSION is set  
to ON automatically.  
: Speaker setting menu (SPK. SETTING)  
7 Level menu (LEVEL)  
FRONT LEFT SPEAKER/FRONT RIGHT SPEAKER/CENTER  
SPEAKER/SURROUND RIGHT SPEAKER/SURROUND LEFT  
SPEAKER  
While monitoring the test tone, adjust the center and surround  
speakers volume as much as that of the front speakers.  
You can adjust the output level in the –6 dB to +6 dB range.  
Ex.: 16:9  
Ex.: 4:3 LB  
Ex.: 4:3 PS  
NOTE  
• Even if “4:3 PS” or “4:3 MULTI PS” is selected, the screen size may  
become “4:3 LB” or “4:3 MULTI LB” with some DVDs. This depends  
on how DVDs are recorded.  
• When selecting “MULTI” options as the monitor type for the multi-  
color system TV, the system outputs PAL or NTSC video signal  
according to the disc/file, regardless of the scan mode setting (see  
page 18).  
TEST TONE*  
Outputs the test tone.  
* The test tone comes out of all of the activated speakers in the  
following sequence:  
Front left speaker Z Center speaker Z Front right speaker  
Z Surround right speaker Z Surround left speaker Z (back  
to the beginning)  
7 PICTURE SOURCE  
When you set the scan mode to the progressive mode (see page 18),  
you can obtain optimal picture quality by selecting whether the  
content on the disc/file is processed by frame (film source) or by  
field (video source).  
NOTE  
• For adjustment of subwoofer output level, see page 37.  
Normally set to AUTO”.  
• AUTO  
7 Delay menu (DELAY)  
FRONT LEFT SPEAKER/FRONT RIGHT SPEAKER/CENTER  
SPEAKER/SURROUND RIGHT SPEAKER/SURROUND LEFT  
SPEAKER  
Used to play a disc/file containing both video and film source  
materials.  
This system recognizes the source type (video or film) of the  
current disc/file according to the disc/file information.  
If the playback picture is unclear or noisy, or the oblique lines of  
the picture are rough, try to change to other modes.  
• FILM  
Suitable for playing back a film source disc/file.  
• VIDEO  
Suitable for playing back a video source disc/file.  
Adjust the distance from the listening position to the speakers.  
Within the range from 0 ms to 15 ms (by 1 ms).  
Example:  
Center speaker  
Subwoofer  
1 ms  
Front right  
Front left  
0 ms  
7 SCREEN SAVER (See page 21.)  
0 ms  
You can activate or deactivate screen saver function.  
3.0 m  
2.7 m  
2.4 m  
7 FILE TYPE  
2.1 m  
Surround left  
When several types of files are recorded on a disc/device, you can  
select which files to play.  
2 ms  
Surround right  
2 ms  
• AUDIO  
Select this to play MP3/WMA files.  
• STILL PICTURE  
Select this to play JPEG files.  
• VIDEO  
1 ms increase (or decrease) in delay time corresponds to about  
30 cm decrease (or increase) in distance.  
Set to “0 ms” for the furthest speaker from your position as the basis  
for the delay time setting.  
Select this to play ASF/MPEG-2/MPEG-1/DivX files.  
In this case, set the delay time of each speaker as follows;  
• Delay time of front speakers: 0 ms  
• Delay time of center speaker: 1 ms  
• Delay time of surround speakers: 2 ms  
36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting DVD preferences  
7 Subwoofer menu (SUBWOOFER)  
: Other setting menu (OTHERS)  
LEVEL  
You can set the output level of the subwoofer in the –6 dB to +6 dB  
range.  
7 RESUME  
You can activate or deactivate Resume Playback function. (See page  
29.)  
CROSS OVER  
The signals below the preset frequency level will be sent to and be  
reproduced by the subwoofer.  
7 ON SCREEN GUIDE  
Select one of the crossover frequency levels according to the size of  
the small speaker connected.  
80Hz: Select when the cone speaker unit built in the speaker is  
about 8 cm.  
100Hz: Select when the cone speaker unit built in the speaker is  
about 6 cm.  
120Hz: Select when the cone speaker unit built in the speaker is  
about 5 cm.  
You can activate or deactivate the on-screen guide icons. (See page  
20.)  
7 DivX registration menu (DivX REGISTRATION)  
The system has its own Registration Code for DivX playback.  
You can confirm the code of your system.  
• Once you play back a disc created by using the Registration Code,  
the system’s code is overwritten by a totally different new one for  
copyright protection purpose.  
Tuner operations  
IMPORTANT  
Before using the remote control for the  
following operation;  
Setting the AM tuner interval  
spacing  
Some countries space AM stations 9 kHz apart, and some countries  
use 10 kHz spacing.  
1
Set the remote control mode selector to  
AUDIO.  
2
Press FM/AM.  
You can only change the AM tuner interval spacing while selecting  
AM as the band.  
The buttons described below are used on pages 37 and 38.  
On the center unit ONLY:  
7 To change the interval spacing into 10 kHz  
Press 8 while holding down 7.  
7 To change the interval spacing into 9 kHz  
Press 3 while holding down 7.  
Manual tuning  
Number  
buttons  
On the remote control:  
1 Press FM/AM repeatedly to select the  
Remote  
control mode  
selector  
band.  
Example: When the system is tuned in to AM 810 kHz.  
Cursor  
(3/2)  
2 Press TUNING 9/( repeatedly until  
you find the frequency you want.  
When you hold down the button until the system starts  
searching for stations and then release it, the system stops  
searching automatically when a station of sufficient signal  
strength is tuned in to.  
On the center unit:  
1 Press SOURCE repeatedly to select the  
band (FM or AM).  
2 Press TUNING +/– repeatedly until you  
find the frequency you want.  
NOTE  
• When an FM stereo program is received, the ST indicator lights on  
the display window.  
37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
See page 37 for button locations.  
Tuner operations  
Preset tuning  
Selecting the FM reception  
mode  
When the stereo FM program currently tuned in is noisy, you can  
change the FM reception mode to improve the reception.  
Once a station is assigned to a channel number, the station can be  
quickly tuned in. You can preset 30 FM and 15 AM stations.  
7 To preset the stations  
7 While listening to an FM station  
1 Tune in the station you want to preset.  
Press FM MODE.  
• If you want to store the FM reception mode for an FM  
station, select the reception mode you want. See “Selecting  
the FM reception mode” on the right column.  
The FM reception mode appears on the display window.  
Each time you press the button, the FM reception mode changes.  
• AUTO:  
Example: When the system is tuned in to FM 103.50 MHz.  
When a program is broadcast in stereo, you will hear stereo  
sound. (The ST indicator lights on the display window.) When in  
monaural, you will hear monaural sound. This mode is also  
useful to suppress static noise between stations.  
• MONO:  
Reception will be improved although you will lose the stereo  
effect. (The MONO indicator lights on the display window.) In  
this mode, you will hear noise until you are tuned in to a station.  
2 Press MEMORY.  
While “CH” and “_ _” are flashing:  
Reducing the noise of AM  
broadcast  
When listening to an AM broadcast with a lot of noise interference,  
you can change the Beat Cut mode to reduce the noise.  
3 Press number button(s) (1-10, h10) to  
select a preset number you want.  
• For details on using the number buttons, see “How to use the  
number buttons. (See page 22.)  
Example: When the preset channel 1 is selected.  
7 While listening to an AM station  
Press FM MODE.  
The current Beat Cut mode appears on the display window.  
Each time you press the button, the Beat Cut mode changes.  
• Choose “BEATCUT1” or “BEATCUT2” according to which gives  
clearer sound.  
If the setting is canceled before you finish, start from step 2  
again.  
While the selected number is flashing:  
4 Press MEMORY.  
“STORED” appears on the display window.  
The station is assigned to the selected preset number.  
If the setting is canceled before you finish, start from step 2  
again.  
5 Repeat steps 1 to 4.  
• Storing a new station to a used number erases the previously  
stored one.  
7 To tune in to a preset station  
1 Press FM/AM repeatedly to select FM or  
AM.  
2 Press number button(s) (1-10, h10) to  
select a preset number.  
• For details on using the number buttons, see “How to use the  
number buttons. (See page 22.)  
NOTE  
• You can also select a preset number by pressing Cursor 3/2.  
38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
References  
To clean the disc  
Wipe the disc with a soft cloth in a straight line  
from center to edge.  
Maintenance  
• DO NOT use any solvent — such as  
conventional record cleaner, spray,  
thinner or benzine — to clean the disc.  
7 Handling Discs  
• Remove the disc from its case by holding it at  
the edge while pressing the center hole lightly.  
• Do not touch the shiny surface of the disc or  
bend the disc.  
7 Cleaning the system  
• Stains on the system should be wiped off with a soft cloth. If the  
system is heavily stained, wipe it with a cloth soaked in water-  
diluted neutral detergent and wrung well, then wipe clean with a  
dry cloth.  
• Put the disc back in its case after use to  
prevent warping.  
• Be careful not to scratch the surface of the disc  
when placing it back in its case.  
• Avoid exposure to direct sunlight, extreme  
temperature and moisture.  
• Since the system may deteriorate in quality, become damaged or  
get its paint peeled off, be careful about the following.  
DO NOT wipe it with a hard cloth.  
DO NOT wipe it forcefully.  
DO NOT wipe it with thinner or benzine.  
DO NOT apply any volatile substance such as insecticides to it.  
DO NOT allow any rubber or plastic to remain in contact with  
it for a long time.  
Troubleshooting  
PROBLEM  
POSSIBLE CAUSE  
SOLUTION  
Power does not come on. The power cord and/or system cord is not connected.  
Connect the power cord and system cord correctly. (See  
pages 12 and 13.)  
The remote control does The batteries are exhausted.  
Replace the batteries. (See page 7.)  
not work.  
Sunlight is shining directly on the remote sensor.  
Hide the remote sensor from direct sunlight.  
No sound.  
The system cord and/or speaker cord is not connected. Check the connection.  
The audio cord is not connected to AUX IN (VCR),  
TAPE IN and/or DIGITAL IN (DBS) correctly.  
Connect the cord correctly. (See page 12.)  
An incorrect source has been selected.  
The video cord is not connected correctly.  
The disc or file is not playable.  
Select the correct source. (See page 17.)  
Connect the cord correctly. (See page 11.)  
Use a playable disc or file. (See pages 3 and 4.)  
No picture is displayed  
on the TV screen.  
No picture is displayed  
on the TV screen, the  
The scan mode is set to the progressive mode  
Change the scan mode to the interlace mode  
(“NT. 480I” or “PAL. 576I”). (See page 18.)  
(“NT. 480P” or “PAL. 576P”) though the center unit is  
picture is blurred, or the connected to the TV which does not support the  
picture is divided into  
two parts.  
progressive video input such as a conventional TV.  
Video and audio are  
distorted.  
The disc is scratched or dirty.  
Replace or clean the disc.  
A VCR is connected between the center unit and the  
TV.  
Connect the center unit and TV directly. (See page 11.)  
The picture does not fit The monitor type is not set correctly.  
the TV screen.  
Set “MONITOR TYPE” properly. (See page 36.)  
The broadcast is hard to Antennas are disconnected.  
hear because of noise.  
Reconnect the antennas correctly and securely. (See  
page 8.)  
If there are any other cases than the noted above or if this system does not seem to work properly, turn off the system and turn it back on.  
39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
References  
7 Subwoofer (SP-PWC90)  
Specifications  
7 Center unit (XV-THC90)  
Audio section  
Amplifier section  
Front/Center/Surround:  
140 W per channel, RMS at 4 at  
1 kHz, with 10 % total harmonic  
distortion.  
Subwoofer:  
300 W, RMS at 4 at 40 Hz, with 10 %  
total harmonic distortion.  
Digital input*:  
DIGITAL IN (DBS):  
(OPTICAL)  
–21 dBm to –15 dBm  
(660 nm E30 nm)  
Speaker section  
* Corresponding to Linear PCM, Dolby Digital, and DTS Digital  
Surround (with sampling frequency — 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz,  
48 kHz)  
Speaker unit:  
25 cm Bass-reflex  
Power Handling Capacity: 300 W  
Impedance:  
Frequency Range:  
Sound Pressure Level:  
4 Ω  
Analog input:  
AUX IN (VCR)  
TAPE IN  
25 Hz to 200 Hz  
74 dB/W·m  
Analog output:  
TAPE OUT  
General  
Power Requirements:  
AC 110 V/ AC 127 V/  
Video section  
Video System:  
Horizontal Resolution:  
Signal-to-Noise Ratio:  
Video output level  
Composite:  
AC 220 - 240 V  
, 50/60 Hz  
PAL/NTSC  
500 lines  
64 dB  
Power Consumption:  
Dimensions (W M H M D):  
Mass:  
110 W (at operation)  
0 W (in standby mode)  
264 mm M 481 mm M 459 mm  
1.0 V(p-p)/75 Ω  
1.0 V(p-p)/75 Ω  
17.6 kg  
S-video-Y:  
S-video-C:  
For PAL: 0.3 V(p-p)/75 Ω  
For NTSC: 0.286 V(p-p)/75 Ω  
1.0 V(p-p)/75 Ω  
7 Satellite Speakers — SP-XTHC90  
Front speakers (SP-THC90F)  
Type:  
Component-Y:  
Component-PB/PR:  
Video input sensitivity/Impedance (VCR IN)  
0.7 V(p-p)/75 Ω  
2-way 3-speaker Bass reflex type  
(Magnetically shielded Type)  
13.5 cm cone M 2  
Composite:  
S-video-Y:  
S-video-C:  
1.0 V(p-p)/75 Ω  
1.0 V(p-p)/75 Ω  
For PAL: 0.3 V(p-p)/75 Ω  
For NTSC: 0.286 V(p-p)/75 Ω  
Speaker:  
6.0 cm cone M 1  
Power Handling Capacity: 140 W  
Impedance:  
Frequency Range:  
Sound Pressure Level:  
Dimensions (W M H M D):  
4 Ω  
60 Hz to 20 000 Hz  
89 dB/W·m  
USB storage  
USB specification:  
Compatible with the USB 2.0 Full-  
Speed  
Mass Storage Class  
FAT16, FAT32  
Max. 500 mA  
270 mm M 1 027.5 mm M 320 mm  
Compatible device:  
Compatible file system:  
Bus power supply:  
Mass:  
8.8 kg each  
Center speaker (SP-THC90C)  
Type:  
2-way 3-speaker Bass reflex type  
Tuner section  
Tuning Range  
FM:  
(Magnetically shielded Type)  
10.5 cm cone M 2  
Speaker:  
87.50 MHz to 108.00 MHz  
At 10 kHz intervals  
530 kHz to 1 710 kHz  
At 9 kHz intervals  
531 kHz to 1 710 kHz  
4.0 cm cone M 1  
AM:  
Power Handling Capacity: 140 W  
Impedance:  
Frequency Range:  
Sound Pressure Level:  
Dimensions (W M H M D):  
4 Ω  
65 Hz to 20 000 Hz  
89 dB/W·m  
General  
Power Requirements:  
Power Consumption:  
400 mm M 141 mm M 171.5 mm  
AC 240 V  
, 50 Hz  
Mass:  
3.8 kg  
25 W (at operation)  
Surround speakers (SP-THC90S)  
Type:  
Speaker:  
1.2 W (in standby mode)  
2-way Bass reflex type  
Dimensions (W M H M D):  
10.5 cm cone M 1  
400 mm M 85 mm M 316 mm  
4.0 cm cone M 1  
Mass:  
3.8 kg  
Power Handling Capacity: 140 W  
Impedance:  
Frequency Range:  
Sound Pressure Level:  
Dimensions (W M H M D):  
4 Ω  
75 Hz to 20 000 Hz  
81 dB/W·m  
140 mm M 228.5 mm M 174 mm  
Mass:  
1.7 kg each  
Designs & specifications are subject to change without notice.  
40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Mains (AC) Line Instruction  
CAUTION for mains (AC) line  
BEFORE PLUGGING IN, do check that your mains (AC) line voltage corresponds with the  
position of the voltage selector switch provided on the outside of this equipment and, if  
different, reset the voltage selector switch, to prevent from a damage or risk of fire/electric  
shock.  
EN  
© 2006 Victor Company of Japan, Limited  
0806RYMMDWJSC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DVD DIGITAL CINEMA SYSTEM  
SISTEMA DE CINEMA DE DVD DIGITAL  
TH-C60  
Consists of XV-THC60, SP-PWC60,  
SP-THC60F, SP-THC60C and SP-THC60S  
Consiste em XV-THC60, SP-WC60,  
SP-THC60F, SP-THC60C e SP-THC60S  
TH-C30  
Consists of XV-THC30, SP-PWC30,  
SP-THC40F, SP-THC40C and SP-THC40S  
Consiste em XV-THC30, SP-PWC30,  
SP-THC40F, SP-THC40C e SP-THC40S  
INSTRUCTIONS  
INSTRUÇÕES  
LVT1504-008A  
[UW]  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Warnings, Cautions and Others/  
Advertêcias, precauções e outras notas  
IMPORTANT FOR LASER PRODUCTS  
1. CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT  
PARA PRODUTOS LASER, IMPORTANTE  
1. PRODUTO LASER DE CLASSE 1  
2. CAUTION: Do not open the top cover. There are no user  
serviceable parts inside the unit; leave all servicing to qualified  
service personnel.  
3. CAUTION: Visible and/or invisible class 1M laser radiation  
when open. Do not view directly with optical instruments.  
2. PRECAUÇÃO: não abrir a cobertura superior. Dentro da  
unidade não existem partes cuja manutenção tenha de ser feita  
pelo usuário; deixe qualquer manutenção a cargo do pessoal de  
serviço qualificado.  
3. PRECAUÇÃO: Radiação laser de classe 1M visível e/ou  
invisível quando aberto. Não olhe diretamente com instrumentos  
óticos.  
CAUTION  
To reduce the risk of electrical shocks, fire, etc.:  
1. Do not remove screws, covers or cabinet.  
2. Do not expose this appliance to rain or moisture.  
PRECAUÇÃO  
Para reduzir o riscos de choques eléctricos, incêndio, etc.:  
1. Não retire parafusos nem desmonte as tampas ou o gabinete.  
2. Não exponha este aparelho à chuva nem à umidade.  
CAUTION —  
button!  
(XV-THC60/XV-THC30)  
PRECAUÇÃO — botão  
(XV-THC60/XV-THC30)  
Desligue a ficha principal da parede para desligar totalmente a  
energia (a lâmpada STANDBY apaga-se). Ao instalar o  
aparelho, certifique-se de que o plugue do cabo de alimentação  
fique facilmente acessível.  
!
Disconnect the mains plug to shut the power off completely  
(the STANDBY lamp goes off). When installing the apparatus,  
ensure that the plug is easily accessible.  
The  
button in any position does not disconnect the mains  
line.  
• When the system is on standby, the STANDBY lamp lights  
red.  
O botão  
em qualquer posição não desliga o cabo principal.  
• When the system is turned on, the STANDBY lamp goes off.  
The power can be remote controlled.  
• Quando o sistema está em espera, a luz da lâmpada  
STANDBY fica vermelha.  
• Quando o sistema está ligado, a lâmpada STANDBY apaga-  
se.  
A energia pode ser controlada à distância.  
CAUTION  
(SP-PWC60/SP-PWC30)  
The power supply to the subwoofer is linked to the center unit.  
The POWER ON lamp on the subwoofer lights green when the  
power is turned on.  
PRECAUÇÃO  
(SP-PWC60/SP-PWC30)  
O fornecimento de energia ao subwoofer está vinculado à  
unidade central. A lâmpada POWER ON do subwoofer  
acende-se em verde quando a alimentação está ligada.  
G-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Warnings, Cautions and Others/ Advertêcias, precauções e outras notas  
Caution: Proper Ventilation  
To avoid risk of electric shock and fire and to protect from damage, place the apparatus on a level surface. The minimal clearances are  
shown below:  
Precaução: ventilação apropriada  
Para evitar o risco de choque eléctrico e incêndio e prevenir avarias, coloque o aparelho em superfície nivelada. Os espaços mínimos  
necessários encontram-se abaixo:  
Wall or obstructions  
XV-THC60/  
XV-THC30  
XV-THC60/  
XV-THC30  
Wall or  
obstructions  
Parede ou  
obstáculo  
Parede ou obstáculo  
8 cm  
3 cm  
Front  
Frente  
10 cm  
3 cm  
No  
obstructions  
Sem  
obstruções  
15 cm  
Wall or obstructions  
Parede ou obstáculo  
Wall or  
20 cm  
obstructions  
Parede ou  
obstáculo  
SP-PWC60/  
SP-PWC30  
SP-PWC60/  
SP-PWC30  
Front  
Frente  
No  
15 cm  
15 cm  
15 cm  
obstructions  
Sem  
obstruções  
CAUTION!  
PRECAUÇÃO!  
To avoid personal injury  
or accidentally dropping  
the unit, have two persons  
unpack, carry, and install  
the unit.  
Para evitar lesões pessoais ou  
queda acidental do aparelho, o  
aparelho deve ser desembalado,  
carregado e instalado por duas  
pessoas.  
SP-THC60: 32.5 kg  
PRECAUÇÃO  
CAUTION  
• Não obstrua as aberturas e orifícios de ventilação. (Se os  
orifícios ou aberturas de ventilação estiverem obstruídos por  
qualquer papel ou tecido, não haverá circulação do ar  
quente.)  
• Do not block the ventilation openings or holes.  
(If the ventilation openings or holes are blocked by a  
newspaper or cloth, etc., the heat may not be able to get out.)  
• Do not place any naked flame sources, such as lighted  
candles, on the apparatus.  
• Não coloque nenhum objeto com chamas, como velas  
acesas, sobre o aparelho.  
• When discarding batteries, environmental problems must be  
considered and local rules or laws governing the disposal of  
these batteries must be followed strictly.  
• Do not expose this apparatus to rain, moisture, dripping or  
splashing and that no objects filled with liquids, such as  
vases, shall be placed on the apparatus.  
• Ao descartar as baterias, leve em consideração os problemas  
que possam ser causados ao meio ambiente e os  
regulamentos e leis locais e governamentais sobre  
recolhimento dessas baterias devem ser rigorosamente  
seguidos.  
• Não exponha este aparelho à chuva, umidade, pingos ou  
esguichos de água, nem coloque em cima do mesmo  
qualquer tipo de recipiente que contenha líquidos, como por  
exemplo vasos.  
[European Union only]  
[Só União Europeia]  
G-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of contents  
Introduction ....................................................2  
Notes on handling ..................................................................... 2  
Supplied accessories .................................................................. 2  
Playback ........................................................ 18  
Basic playback ...........................................................................18  
One Touch Replay ...................................................................20  
Fast-forward/fast-reverse search ............................................20  
Skip to the beginning of a desired selection .........................21  
Skipping at about 5-minute intervals ....................................21  
Locating a desired title/group using number buttons ........21  
Playing back a bonus group ....................................................22  
Selecting the desired title/playlist from the control display .....22  
About discs ......................................................3  
Playable disc types ..................................................................... 3  
Playable file types ....................................................................... 4  
Description of parts and controls ..................5  
Connections .....................................................8  
Advanced operations ................................... 23  
Using the surround mode .......................................................23  
Using the on-screen bar ..........................................................24  
Playing from a specified position on a disc ..........................26  
Using the file control display ..................................................27  
Resume Playback ......................................................................28  
Selecting a view angle ..............................................................28  
Selecting the subtitle ................................................................28  
Selecting the audio ...................................................................29  
Special picture playback ..........................................................29  
Program Playback ....................................................................31  
Random Playback ....................................................................32  
Repeat Playback ........................................................................32  
Tray lock ....................................................................................33  
Setting the sound balance .......................................................33  
Connecting the FM and AM antennas ................................... 8  
Connecting the satellite (front, center, surround) speakers ......  
9
Speaker layout .......................................................................... 11  
Connecting a TV ...................................................................... 11  
Connecting the powered subwoofer ..................................... 11  
Connecting to an analog component ................................... 12  
Connecting to a digital component ...................................... 12  
Connecting a USB mass storage class device ....................... 12  
Connecting the power cord .................................................... 12  
Operating external components with the  
remote control ..............................................13  
Operating the TV ..................................................................... 13  
Operating the DBS tuner or CATV converter .................... 14  
Operating the VCR .................................................................. 14  
Setting DVD preferences ............................. 34  
Using the setup menus ............................................................34  
Menu description .....................................................................34  
Basic operations ............................................15  
Turning the system on/off ...................................................... 15  
Selecting the source to play .................................................... 16  
Adjusting the volume [VOLUME] ....................................... 16  
Listening with headphones (not supplied) .......................... 16  
Turning off the sound temporarily [MUTING] ................. 16  
Adjusting the brightness of the indications [DIMMER] ... 16  
Sleep Timer [SLEEP] ............................................................... 17  
Adjusting the output level of the subwoofer and speakers ......17  
Adjusting the sound ................................................................ 17  
Changing the scan mode ........................................................ 17  
Tuner operations .......................................... 36  
Setting the AM tuner interval spacing ..................................36  
Manual tuning ..........................................................................36  
Preset tuning .............................................................................37  
Selecting the FM reception mode ..........................................37  
Reducing the noise of AM broadcast ....................................37  
References .................................................... 38  
Maintenance .............................................................................38  
Troubleshooting .......................................................................38  
Specifications ............................................................................39  
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
7 Safety precautions  
Avoid moisture, water and dust  
Notes on handling  
7 Important cautions  
Installation of the system  
• Select a place which is level, dry and neither too hot nor too cold;  
between 5°C and 35°C.  
Do not place the system in moist or dusty places.  
Avoid high temperatures  
Do not expose the system to direct sunlight and do not place it near  
a heating device.  
When you are away  
When away on travel or for other reasons for an extended period of  
time, disconnect the power cord plugs from the wall outlet.  
• Leave sufficient distance between the system and the TV.  
• Do not use the system in a place subject to vibration.  
Power cord  
Do not block the vents  
Blocking the vents may damage the system.  
• Do not handle the power cord with wet hands.  
• A small amount of power is always consumed while the power  
cord is connected to the wall outlet (center unit only).  
• When unplugging the power cord from the wall outlet, always  
pull on the plug, not the power cord.  
Care of the cabinet  
When cleaning the system, use a soft cloth and follow the relevant  
instructions on the use of chemically-coated cloths. Do not use  
benzene, thinner or other organic solvents including disinfectants.  
These may cause deformation or discoloring.  
To prevent malfunctions of the system  
• There are no user-serviceable parts inside. If anything goes  
wrong, unplug the power cord and consult your dealer.  
• Do not insert any metallic object into the system.  
• Do not use any non-standard shape disc (like a heart, flower or  
credit card, etc.) available on the market, because it may damage  
the system.  
If water gets inside the system  
Turn the system off and disconnect the power cord plug from the  
wall outlet, then call the store where you made your purchase. Using  
the system in this condition may cause a fire or electrical shock.  
• Do not use a disc with tape, stickers, or paste on it, because it may  
damage the system.  
Supplied accessories  
Label sticker  
Check to be sure you have all of the supplied accessories.  
The number in parentheses is the quantity of the pieces supplied.  
If anything is missing, contact your dealer immediately.  
• Remote control (1)  
Sticker  
Paste  
• Batteries (2)  
• FM antenna (1)  
• AM loop antenna (1)  
Note about copyright laws  
• Power cord (1)  
Check the copyright laws in your country before recording from the  
discs. Recording of copyrighted material may infringe copyright  
laws.  
• System cord (1)  
• Composite video cord (1)  
• AC plug adapters (2)  
• Speaker cords (only for TH-C60)  
4 m: For satellite (front left/right) and center speakers (3)  
10 m: For satellite speakers (surround left/right) (2)  
• Screws (only for TH-C60)  
Note about copyguard system  
The discs are protected by copyguard system. When you connect  
the system to your VCR directly, the copyguard system activates and  
the picture may not be played back correctly.  
M5 x 40 mm (4)  
M4 x 20 mm (8)  
• Speaker cord clamps (only for TH-C60) (4)  
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
About discs  
Notes on DVD-R and DVD-RW  
• This system does not support “multi-border” disc.  
Playable disc types  
Notes on CD-R and CD-RW  
• This system can play CD-Rs or CD-RWs recorded with ISO 9660  
format.  
This system has been designed to play back the following discs:  
DVD VIDEO  
DVD AUDIO  
• This system supports “multi-session” discs (up to 20 sessions).  
• This system cannot play “packet write” discs.  
Region code of DVD VIDEO  
VCD/SVCD  
Audio CD  
DVD VIDEO players and DVD VIDEO discs have their own  
Region Code numbers. This system can play back DVD VIDEO  
discs whose Region Code numbers include the system’s Region  
Code, which is indicated on the rear panel.  
• Example of playable DVD:  
The in the list below shows available disc types and recording  
formats.  
If a DVD with an improper Region Code number is loaded,  
“REGION CODE ERROR!” appears on the TV screen and playback  
cannot start.  
Disc type  
1
1
1
CD-R/-RW*  
DVD-R*  
DVD-RW*  
Recording  
format  
DVD Video  
DVD Audio  
DVD VR  
VCD/SVCD  
Audio CD  
MP3  
Some discs may not be played back because of their disc  
characteristics, recording conditions, or damage or stain on them.  
Unplayable discs  
DVD-ROM, DVD-RAM, CD-I (CD-I Ready), Photo CD, SACD,  
etc.  
2
2
*  
*  
Playing back these discs will generate noise and damage the  
speakers.  
2
2
WMA  
*  
*  
2
2
JPEG  
*  
*  
2
2
ASF  
*  
*  
3
2
2
MPEG-2  
MPEG-1  
DivX  
*  
*  
*  
3
2
2
*  
*  
*  
2
2
*  
*  
1
2
3
*
*
*
This system can play finalized discs only.  
Recorded with UDF Bridge format.  
This system may not be able to play back a file if the file size is  
too large.  
• It is possible to play back finalized +R/+RW (DVD Video Format  
only) discs. “DVD” lights on the display panel when a +R/+RW  
disc is loaded.  
• This system accommodates the NTSC and PAL system. When  
you play an NTSC disc with the scan mode set to PAL (see page  
17), the NTSC video signal is converted to the PAL60 signal and  
output.  
• The Non-DVD side of a “DualDisc” does not comply with the  
“Compact Disc Digital Audio” standard. Therefore, the use of  
Non-DVD side of a DualDisc on this product may not be  
recommended.  
• On some DVD VIDEOs, DVD AUDIOs, VCDs or SVCDs,  
their actual operation may be different from what is explained  
in this manual. This is due to the disc programming and disc  
structure, not a malfunction of this system.  
DVD Logo is a trademark of DVD Format/Logo Licensing  
Corporation.  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
About discs  
For JPEG files  
• We recommend to record a file at 640 x 480 resolution. (If a file  
has been recorded at a resolution of more than 640 x 480, it will  
take a longer time to be displayed.)  
Playable file types  
For all playable files  
• This system can only play baseline JPEG files.  
• The system can only recognize and play files with one of the  
following extensions, which can be in any combination of upper  
and lower case;  
For ASF files  
• The system supports the types of the advanced simple profile as  
MPEG-4 files (MPEG-4 ASF).  
• The system supports MPEG-4 files with the following conditions:  
File format: ASF  
Visual profile: MPEG-4 SP (Simple Profile)  
Audio CODEC: G.726  
MP3: .MP3, “.mp3”  
WMA: .WMA”, “.wma”  
JPEG: .JPG, “.JPEG, “.jpg, “.jpeg”  
ASF: .ASF, “.asf ”  
MPEG-2/MPEG-1: .MPG, “.MPEG, “.mpg, “.mpeg”  
DivX: .DIVX, “.DIV, “.divx, “.div, and .AVI, “.avi”  
• Some files may not be played back. In this case, “NOT  
SUPPORTED” appears on the TV screen.  
Max. picture size: 352 x 288 (CIF)  
Max. bit rate: 384 kbps  
• Some files may not be played back normally because of their disc  
characteristics or recording conditions.  
• The system recognizes up to 150 tracks (files) per group, 99  
groups per disc/device, and the total number of the tracks (files)  
that the system can play is 4000.  
• MP3/WMA/JPEG/ASF/MPEG-2/MPEG-1/DivX files require a  
longer readout time. (It differs due to the complexity of the  
directory/file configuration.)  
• If different kinds of files are mixed, set the FILE TYPE setting in  
the PICTURE menu to the appropriate setting for the data to be  
read (AUDIO, STILL PICTURE” or “VIDEO”). (See page 35.)  
For MPEG-2/MPEG-1 files  
• The stream format should conform to MPEG system/program  
stream.  
• 720 x 576 pixels (25 fps)/720 x 480 pixels (30 fps) is  
recommended for the highest resolution.  
• This system also supports the resolutions of 352 x 576/480 x 576/  
352 x 288 pixels (25 fps) and 352 x 480/480 x 480/352 x 240 pixels  
(30 fps).  
• The file format should be MP@ML (Main Profile at Main Level)/  
SP@ML (Simple Profile at Main Level)/MP@LL (Main Profile at  
Low Level).  
• Audio streams should conform to MPEG1 Audio Layer-2 or  
MPEG2 Audio Layer-2.  
For MP3/WMA files  
• The system supports MP3/WMA files recorded with a bit rate of  
32 – 320 kbps and a sampling frequency of 16 kHz, 22.05 kHz,  
24 kHz*, 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, or 48 kHz.  
• If the track information (track title, artist, and album name, etc.)  
is recorded, it appears in the file control display on the TV screen.  
(See page 27.)  
For DivX files  
• The system supports DivX 6.x, 5.x, 4.x and 3.11.  
• The system supports DivX files whose resolution is 720 x 480  
pixels or less (30 fps), and 720 x 576 pixels or less (25 fps).  
• Audio stream should conform to Dolby Digital (including multi  
channel) or MPEG1 Audio Layer-3 (MP3).  
• The system does not support GMC (Global Motion  
Compression).  
We recommend to record each piece of material (song) at a  
sample rate of 44.1 kHz and at a data transfer rate of  
128 (96*) kbps.  
* For WMA only  
• The file encoded in the interlaced scanning mode may not be  
played back correctly.  
• The system has its own Registration Code for DivX playback.  
If necessary, you can confirm the Registration Code of your  
system using the OTHERS menu. (See page 36.)  
• This product incorporates copyright protection technology that  
is protected by U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights.  
Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized  
by Macrovision, and is intended for home and other limited  
viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision.  
Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited.  
• “CONSUMERS SHOULD NOTE THAT NOT ALL HIGH  
DEFINITION TELEVISION SETS ARE FULLY COMPATIBLE  
WITH THIS PRODUCT AND MAY CAUSE ARTIFACTS TO  
BE DISPLAYED IN THE PICTURE. IN CASE OF 525 OR 625  
PROGRESSIVE SCAN PICTURE PROBLEMS, IT IS  
RECOMMENDED THAT THE USER SWITCH THE  
CONNECTION TO THE ‘STANDARD DEFINITION’  
OUTPUT.  
• USE OF THIS PRODUCT IN ANY MANNER THAT  
COMPLIES WITH THE MPEG-4 VISUAL STANDARD IS  
PROHIBITED, EXCEPT FOR USE BY A CONSUMER  
ENGAGING IN PERSONAL AND NON-COMMERCIAL  
ACTIVITIES.  
• DivX, DivX Ultra Certified, and associated logos are trademarks  
of DivX, Inc. and are used under license.  
• Official DivX® Ultra Certified product  
• Plays all versions of DivX video (including DivX 6) with  
enhanced playback of DivX® media files and the DivX® Media  
Format  
®
®
IF THERE ARE QUESTIONS REGARDING OUR TV SET  
COMPATIBILITY WITH THIS MODEL 525p AND 625p DVD  
PLAYER, PLEASE CONTACT OUR CUSTOMER SERVICE  
CENTER.”  
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Description of parts and controls  
Front panel (center unit)  
The numbers in the figures indicate the pages where the details of the parts are described.  
Display window  
20  
24  
36  
37  
19  
24  
17  
19  
21  
22  
31  
28  
32, 33  
16  
19  
30  
19  
37  
36  
32  
18  
18  
18  
20, 36  
Disc tray (inside): 18  
Remote sensor: 7  
16  
15  
15  
18  
12  
16  
Rear panel (center unit)  
11  
12  
8
12  
11  
11  
12  
12  
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Description of parts and controls  
Powered subwoofer  
SP-PWC60  
11  
10  
POWER ON lamp: 15  
See below.  
Power cord: 12  
Front  
Rear  
SP-PWC30  
11  
10  
POWER ON lamp: 15  
See below.  
Power cord: 12  
Front  
Rear  
NOTE  
* Do not block the ventilation openings to allow proper air  
circulation by the cooling fan.  
• For safety reasons, always ensure that there is sufficient space behind  
the powered subwoofer.  
Setting the VOLTAGE SELECTOR  
Before plugging, set the correct voltage for your area with the voltage selector switch on the rear panel of the powered subwoofer.  
Voltage selector switch  
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Description of parts and controls  
Remote control  
Putting batteries in the remote control  
15  
14  
16  
18  
13  
13  
R03 (UM-4)/AAA (24F) type dry-cell  
batteries (supplied)  
Number  
buttons: 21  
13  
13  
13 - 36  
22, 26  
22, 26  
17 - 37  
If the range or effectiveness of the remote control decreases, replace  
both batteries.  
13, 16  
CAUTION  
24 - 33  
• Do not expose batteries to heat or flame.  
16  
Operating the system from the remote control  
Aim the remote control directly to the front panel of the center unit.  
• Do not block the remote sensor.  
14, 20  
18, 37  
21, 36  
28, 30  
28, 29  
32  
18, 37  
18  
20, 29  
30  
24  
31  
21  
26  
31, 32  
19  
34  
33  
18, 28, 30  
17  
17  
17  
17  
17, 30  
16  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Do not connect the power cord until all other connections have been made.  
Connections  
If reception is poor  
Connecting the FM and AM  
antennas  
Center unit  
7 AM loop antenna  
AM loop antenna  
Setting up supplied AM loop antenna  
Outdoor single vinyl-covered wire antenna  
(not supplied)  
If the antenna cord is covered with the insulation  
coat, twist and pull the insulation coat off and  
remove.  
7 FM antenna  
FM antenna (supplied)  
Center unit  
Connecting AM loop antenna  
Extend the supplied FM antenna  
horizontally.  
1
Center unit  
If reception is poor  
Center unit  
Outdoor FM antenna (not  
supplied)  
2
Standard type (75  
coaxial) connector  
Outdoor FM antenna cord (not  
supplied)  
Antenna cord  
3
NOTE  
• We recommend that you use coaxial cable for the FM antenna as it is  
well-shielded against interference.  
Turn the loop antenna until you have the best reception during  
AM broadcast program reception.  
NOTE  
• Make sure the antenna conductors do not touch any other terminals,  
connecting cords or power cords. This could cause poor reception.  
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Do not connect the power cord until all other connections have been made.  
Connections  
2
When assembling a speaker without stand:  
Connecting the satellite (front,  
center, surround) speakers  
Speaker  
For TH-C30, the front, surround and center speakers are  
equipped with their speaker cords attached directly to their  
speaker unit instead of having speaker terminals on their cabinet.  
A: Use these screws (M4 x  
45 mm) when assembling the  
speaker with the base plate.  
Base plate  
Stand (or speaker  
directly)*  
Screw M4 x 20 mm  
(supplied)*  
Front speaker  
(SP-THC40F)  
Surround speaker  
(SP-THC40S)  
Center speaker  
(SP-THC40C)  
7 Assembling the front and surround speakers— TH-C60  
* When assembling the speaker with the base plate, use the  
screws A.  
3
White  
Red  
Base plate (4)  
Front speaker  
(SP-THC60F) (2)  
Surround  
speaker  
(SP-THC60S) (2)  
Stand (4)  
Black  
Black  
• Check the model name of each speaker from the label on the  
rear to locate each speaker correctly.  
You can route the speaker cord  
by using speaker cord clamp  
(supplied).  
Assembled speakers  
or  
7 Connecting the center speaker— TH-C60  
With stand: Refer to steps 1 to  
3.  
Without stand: Refer to steps  
2 and 3.  
Before assembling —  
• Prepare a Phillips screwdriver (not supplied).  
Center speaker (SP-THC60C) (1)  
Take care not to drop any component part while assembling;  
otherwise, it may cause damage to the floor or injury.  
1
Speaker  
Stand  
Red  
White  
Screw M5 x 40 mm (supplied)  
Black  
Black  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Do not connect the power cord until all other connections have been made.  
Connections  
7 Connecting the satellite speakers to the subwoofer  
Note that the illustration below is for SP-PWC60.  
Before connecting the speaker cords;  
Twist and pull the insulation coat off and remove.  
Speaker cord  
Powered subwoofer  
TH-C60: SP-PWC60  
TH-C30: SP-PWC30  
• Connect the black cords to the black (r) terminals.  
• Connect the white cords to the (q) terminals  
Front speakers  
TH-C60: SP-THC60F  
TH-C30: SP-THC40F  
referring to the table below:  
FRONT SPEAKERS (LEFT)  
FRONT SPEAKERS (RIGHT)  
CENTER SPEAKER  
White  
Red  
Green  
Blue  
SURROUND SPEAKERS (LEFT)  
SURROUND SPEAKERS (RIGHT) Gray  
Surround speakers  
TH-C60: SP-THC60S  
TH-C30: SP-THC40S  
Center speaker  
TH-C60: SP-THC60C  
TH-C30: SP-THC40C  
Precautions for daily use  
CAUTION  
• When moving the speakers, do not pull the speaker cords;  
otherwise, the speakers may fall over, causing damage or injury.  
• Do not reproduce sounds at so high a volume that the sound is  
distorted; otherwise, the speakers may be damaged by internal  
heat buildup.  
• If you connect speakers other than the supplied ones, use speakers of  
the same speaker impedance (SPEAKER IMPEDANCE) indicated  
near the speaker terminals on the rear of the powered subwoofer.  
• DO NOT connect more than one speaker to one speaker terminal.  
• When installing the satellite speakers on the wall;  
– Be sure to have them installed on the wall by qualified personnel.  
DO NOT install the satellite speakers on the wall by yourself to  
avoid unexpected damage from falling off the wall due to incorrect  
installation or weakness in wall structure.  
– Care must be taken in selecting a location for speaker installation  
on a wall. Injury to personnel or damage to equipment may result  
if the speakers installed interfere with daily activities.  
For TH-C60:  
• When holding a speaker, always grasp the lower portion.  
• Do not lean against the speakers, as the speakers could fall down  
or break, possibly causing an injury. Especially be careful that  
children do not lean against them.  
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Do not connect the power cord until all other connections have been made.  
Connections  
Speaker layout  
To obtain the best possible sound from this system, you need to  
place all the speakers except the subwoofer at the same distance  
from the listening position.  
Connecting a TV  
You can get better picture quality in the order — Component  
video > S-video > Composite video.  
• Distortion of picture may occur when connecting to the TV via a  
VCR, or to a TV with a built-in VCR.  
You need to set “MONITOR TYPE” in the PICTURE menu  
correctly according to the aspect ratio of your TV. (See page 35.)  
Center speaker  
Front left  
speaker  
Front right  
speaker  
7 To connect a TV equipped with the component video input  
Powered  
subwoofer  
jacks  
If your TV supports progressive video input, you can enjoy a high  
quality picture by setting the progressive scan mode to active. (See  
page 17.)  
Center unit  
TV  
To component  
video input  
Surround left  
speaker  
Surround right  
speaker  
Component video cord (not supplied)  
If your speakers cannot be placed at the same distance from the  
listening position  
You can adjust the delay time of the speakers. See “Delay menu  
(DELAY)” on page 35.  
NOTE  
• If the component video input jacks of your TV are of the BNC type,  
use a plug adapter (not supplied) to convert the pin plugs to BNC  
plugs.  
• The component video signals can be output only when you select  
DVD or USB MEMORY as the source to play. (See page 16.)  
NOTE  
• Place the satellite speakers on a flat and level surface.  
• The front and center speakers are magnetically shielded to avoid color  
distortions on TVs. However, if not installed properly, they may cause  
color distortions. So, pay attention to the following when installing  
the speakers.  
– When placing the speakers near a TV set, turn off the TV’s main  
power switch or unplug it before installing the speakers. Then wait  
at least 30 minutes before turning on the TV’s main power switch  
again.  
7 To connect a TV equipped with the composite or S-video jacks  
Center unit  
Composite video cord (supplied)  
or  
Some TVs may still be affected even though you have followed the  
above. If this happens, move the speakers away from the TV.  
• The surround speakers are not magnetically shielded.  
If they are located nearby the TV or monitor, it will probably cause  
color distortion on the screen. To avoid this, do not place the speakers  
nearby the TV or monitor.  
S-video cord  
(not supplied)  
Align the 5 marks.  
To S-video input  
To composite  
video input  
• Be sure to place the powered subwoofer to the TV’s right. If you place  
the powered subwoofer to the TV’s left, keep sufficient distance  
between them to prevent the TV screen from appearing mottled.  
TV  
NOTE  
• Select the appropriate scan mode according to your TV. (See page 17.)  
Connecting the powered  
subwoofer  
Powered  
subwoofer  
System cord  
(supplied)  
Center unit  
Align the 5 marks.  
Align the 5 marks.  
11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Do not connect the power cord until all other connections have been made.  
Connections  
Connecting to an analog  
component  
Connecting a USB mass storage  
class device  
You can connect a USB mass storage class device such as a USB  
flash memory device, hard disc drive, multimedia card reader,  
digital camera, etc. to this system.  
You can enjoy the sound of an analog component.  
Center unit  
• After connecting a USB mass storage class device to this system  
and selecting USB MEMORY as the source, the file control  
display appears on the TV screen. (See page 27.)  
USB cable (not supplied)  
Center unit (on the  
front panel)  
S-video cord  
(not supplied)  
RCA pin plug  
cord  
or  
(not supplied)  
NOTE  
Composite video  
cord  
• When connecting a USB mass storage class device, refer also to its  
manual.  
• Connect one USB mass storage class device to the system at a time. Do  
not use a USB hub.  
(not supplied)  
1
2
3
• You cannot charge the USB mass storage class device while  
connecting it to the USB MEMORY jack.  
• While playing back a file in a USB mass storage class device, do not  
disconnect the device. It may cause a malfunction of both the system  
and the device.  
VCR (1 3 or 2 3)  
TV (3)  
Cassette recorder (3)  
• JVC bears no responsibility for any loss of data in the USB mass  
storage class device while using this system.  
• When connecting with a USB cable, use a cable less than 1 m in  
length.  
1 To composite video output  
2 To S-video output  
3 To audio output  
• This system is compatible with the USB 2.0 Full-Speed (not  
compatible with the USB 1.1).  
NOTE  
• You can play back the following types of files in a USB mass storage  
class device (maximum data transfer rate: 2 Mbps):  
– Music: MP3, WMA  
• The signals input to the VIDEO jack of the VCR IN jacks will be  
output only from the VIDEO jack of the VIDEO OUT jacks, not from  
the S-VIDEO jack of the VIDEO OUT jacks.  
– Picture: JPEG  
– Movie: MPEG-4 (ASF), DivX (maximum frame rate of 30 fps for  
progressive)  
• You cannot play back a file larger than 2 GB.  
• When playing a file which has a large transfer rate, frames or sounds  
may be dropped during playback.  
• This system cannot recognize a USB mass storage class device whose  
rating exceeds 5 V/500 mA.  
• This system may not recognize some USB mass storage class devices.  
• This system may not play back some files even though their formats  
are listed above.  
Connecting to a digital  
component  
You can enjoy the sound of a digital component.  
Center unit  
.
Connecting the power cord  
Make sure that all other connections have been completed.  
To digital optical output  
DBS* tuner  
MD player  
Digital optical cord (not supplied)  
Center unit  
Powered  
subwoofer  
* DBS = Direct Broadcasting Satellite  
NOTE  
• Only digital audio signals can be input when selecting “DBS” as the  
source to play. (See page 16.) When connecting a video component  
such as a DBS tuner, operate this system to listen to the sound.  
Power cord  
(supplied)  
Power cord  
Plug into AC outlets.  
CAUTION  
• Disconnect the power cord before cleaning or moving the system.  
• Do not pull on the power cord to unplug the cord. When unplugging  
the cord, always grasp and pull the plug so as not to damage the cord.  
• If the AC outlets do not match the AC plugs, use the supplied AC plug  
adapter.  
12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Operating external components with the remote control  
The buttons described below are used on pages 13 and 14.  
Operating the TV  
7 To set the manufacturer’s code  
1 Slide the remote control mode selector  
to TV.  
2 Press and hold F TV.  
Keep the button pressed until step 4 is finished.  
3 Press ENTER.  
Number  
buttons  
4 Press number buttons (1-9, 0) to enter  
the manufacturers code (2 digits).  
Examples:  
For a Hitachi TV: Press 1, then 0.  
For a Toshiba TV: Press 0, then 8.  
Remote  
control mode  
selector  
Manufacturer  
JVC  
Code Manufacturer  
Code  
12  
01*  
10  
Samsung  
Sanyo  
Sharp  
Hitachi  
13, 14  
06  
Magnavox  
Mitsubishi  
Panasonic  
Philips  
02  
03  
Sony  
07  
04, 11 Toshiba  
08  
15  
05  
Zenith  
09  
RCA  
* “01” is the initial setting.  
(play button)  
5 Release F TV.  
If there is more than one code listed for corresponding brand,  
try each one until you enter the correct one.  
NOTE  
7 Operation  
• Manufacturers’ codes are subject to change without notice.  
• Set the codes again after replacing the batteries of the remote control.  
Aim the remote control at the TV.  
IMPORTANT  
Before using the remote control to operate a TV;  
• Set the remote control mode selector to TV.  
The following buttons are available:  
F TV:  
Turns TV on and off.  
Adjusts the volume.  
Selects the input mode (either TV or  
VIDEO).  
Changes the channels.  
TV VOL +/–:  
TV/VIDEO:  
CH +/–:  
1-10, 0, h10 (100+): Selects the channel.  
TV RETURN:  
Alternates between the previously selected  
channel and the current channel.  
NOTE  
• The operating buttons may differ depending on manufacturers.  
13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
See page 13 for button locations.  
Operating external components with the remote control  
Operating the DBS tuner or  
CATV converter  
Operating the VCR  
7 To set the manufacturer’s code  
7 To set the manufacturer’s code  
1 Slide the remote control mode selector  
to VCR/DBS.  
1 Slide the remote control mode selector  
to VCR/DBS.  
2 Press VCR.  
2 Press DBS.  
3 Press and hold F VCR/DBS.  
Keep the button pressed until step 5 is finished.  
3 Press and hold F VCR/DBS.  
Keep the button pressed until step 5 is finished.  
4 Press ENTER.  
4 Press ENTER.  
5 Press number buttons (1-9, 0) to enter  
the manufacturers code (2 digits).  
Examples:  
5 Press number buttons (1-9, 0) to enter  
the manufacturers code (2 digits).  
Examples:  
For a Philips VCR: Press 0, then 9.  
For an NEC VCR: Press 2, then 5.  
For a GI Jerrold product: Press 0, then 1.  
For a Sony product: Press 2, then 0.  
Manufacturer  
JVC  
Code  
Manufacturer  
Philips  
Code  
09  
01*, 02, 03  
11, 26  
29  
Manufacturer  
Echostar  
GI Jerrold  
Hamlin  
Code  
Emerson  
Fisher  
RCA  
05, 06  
24  
21  
Samsung  
01*, 02, 03, 04, 05, 06, 07, 08  
Funai  
10, 14, 15, 16 Sanyo  
21, 22, 23  
27, 28  
30  
15, 16, 17, 18  
13, 14  
19  
Gold Star  
Hitachi  
12  
Sharp  
Pioneer  
04  
Shintom  
Sony  
RCA  
Mitsubishi  
NEC  
13  
18, 19, 20  
08  
Scientific Atlanta  
Sony  
09, 10  
20  
25  
Zenith  
Panasonic  
07, 17  
Zenith  
11, 12  
* “01” is the initial setting.  
* “01” is the initial setting.  
6 Release F VCR/DBS.  
6 Release F VCR/DBS.  
If there is more than one code listed for your brand, try each  
one until you enter the correct one.  
If there is more than one code listed for your brand, try each  
one until you enter the correct one.  
7 Operation  
7 Operation  
Aim the remote control at the VCR.  
Aim the remote control at the DBS tuner or CATV converter.  
IMPORTANT  
IMPORTANT  
Before using the remote control to operate a  
VCR;  
Before using the remote control to operate a  
DBS tuner or CATV converter;  
1
Set the remote control mode selector  
to VCR/DBS.  
1
Set the remote control mode selector  
to VCR/DBS.  
2
Press VCR.  
2
Press DBS.  
The following buttons are available:  
The following buttons are available:  
F VCR/DBS:  
Turns VCR on and off.  
F VCR/DBS:  
Turns DBS tuner or CATV converter on and  
3 (play button):  
Starts playback.  
off.  
7:  
8:  
Stops operation.  
CH +/–:  
Changes the channels.  
Pauses playback.  
Fast forwards video tape.  
Rewinds video tape.  
Press this button together with 3 (play  
button) to start recording or together with 8  
to pause recording.  
1-10, 0, h10 (100+): Selects the channel.  
y
:
1:  
REC:  
CH +/–:  
Changes the TV channels on the VCR.  
NOTE  
• When operating a VCR or DBS tuner/CATV converter;  
– The source setting of VCR or DBS remains after you have changed  
the remote control mode selector to AUDIO or TV. When operating  
VCR or DBS tuner/CATV converter again, it is not necessary to  
press VCR or DBS after setting the remote control mode selector.  
14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic operations  
The buttons on the remote control are used to explain most of the  
operations in this manual. You can use the buttons on the center  
unit same as on the remote control for operations unless  
otherwise noted.  
Turning the system on/off  
On the remote control:  
Press FAUDIO.  
On the center unit:  
IMPORTANT  
Before using the remote control for the following  
operation;  
Press F.  
When DVD or USB MEMORY is selected as the source (see page  
16), the following messages will appear on the TV screen.  
• Set the remote control mode selector to AUDIO.  
The buttons described below are used on pages 15 to 17.  
Source  
selecting  
buttons  
• “OPEN”/“CLOSE”:  
Appears when opening or closing the disc tray.  
• “NOW READING”:  
Appears when the system is reading the disc/file information.  
• “REGION CODE ERROR!”:  
Appears when the Region Code of the DVD VIDEO does not  
match the code the system supports. The disc cannot be  
played back.  
• “NO DISC”:  
Remote  
control mode  
selector  
Appears when no disc is loaded.  
• “NO USB DEVICE”:  
Appears when no USB mass storage class device is connected.  
• “CANNOT PLAY THIS DISC”:  
Appears when unplayable disc is loaded.  
• “CANNOT PLAY THIS DEVICE”:  
Appears when unplayable USB mass storage class device is  
connected.  
Cursor  
(3/2)/  
ENTER  
NOTE  
• The STANDBY lamp on the center unit lights red when the power is  
turned off. The lamp goes off when the power is turned on.  
• The power supply to the subwoofer is linked to the center unit. The  
POWER ON lamp on the subwoofer lights green when the power is  
turned on.  
• A small amount of power is consumed even when the power is turned  
off (center unit only). This is called standby mode and the STANDBY  
lamp lights in this mode. Unplug the power cord from the AC outlet  
to turn the power off completely.  
• You can also turn on the system by pressing the following buttons:  
– One of the DISC (1-5) buttons (with SHIFT pressed) on the remote  
control  
– One of the DISC (1-5) 0 buttons on the center unit  
– One of the source selecting buttons or 3 on the remote control  
– One of the DISC (1-5) 3 buttons or 3 on the center unit  
STANDBY lamp  
15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
See page 15 for button locations.  
Basic operations  
Selecting the source to play  
Listening with headphones  
(not supplied)  
On the remote control:  
Press one of the source selecting buttons  
CAUTION  
Be sure to turn down the volume;  
• Before connecting or putting on headphones as high volume may  
damage both the headphones and your hearing.  
• Before disconnecting headphones as high volume may be suddenly  
output from the speakers.  
(DVD, USB MEMORY, FM/AM, VCR or DBS).  
DVD:  
To play back a disc (DVD VIDEO, VCD etc.). (See page 18.)  
USB MEMORY:  
To play back a file in a USB mass storage class device. (See “To play  
a file in a USB mass storage class device” on page 18.)  
While connecting a pair of headphones to the PHONES jack on the  
center unit, the system automatically cancels the surround mode  
(see page 23) currently selected, deactivates the speakers, turns the  
subwoofer’s power off, and activates the headphone mode.  
“H. PHONE” appears on the display window.  
FM/AM:  
To tune in an FM or AM station. (See page 36.) Each time you press  
the button, the band alternates between FM and AM.  
VCR:  
To select the source from a component connected to the VCR IN  
jacks and AUX IN (VCR) jacks. (See page 12.)  
Headphone mode  
When using the headphones, the following signals are output  
regardless of your speaker setting;  
DBS:  
To select the source from a component connected to the DIGITAL  
IN (DBS) jack. (See page 12.)  
• For 2 channel sources, the front left and right channel signals are  
output from the headphones.  
• Multi-channel signals are down-mixed and output from the  
headphones.  
• (For DVD AUDIO) When the disc prohibits down-mixing, only  
the front left and right channels are output from the headphones.  
On the center unit:  
Press SOURCE repeatedly until the source  
name you want appears on the display  
window.  
NOTE  
Turning off the sound  
temporarily [MUTING]  
• When AM, FM or DBS is selected, this system does not output video  
signals.  
• It may take time to change the source.  
Press MUTING.  
To restore the sound  
Perform one of the following:  
• Press MUTING again.  
Adjusting the volume  
[VOLUME]  
• Press VOL +/– (or turn VOLUME on the center unit).  
CAUTION  
• Always set the volume to minimum level before starting any source.  
If the volume is set at a high level, the sudden blast of sound could  
permanently damage your hearing and/or blow out the speakers.  
Adjusting the brightness of the  
indications [DIMMER]  
On the remote control:  
Press DIMMER.  
Press VOL +/–.  
On the center unit:  
Each time you press the button, you can change the brightness level  
in 3 steps.  
Turn VOLUME.  
To increase the volume, turn VOLUME clockwise.  
To decrease the volume, turn VOLUME counterclockwise.  
16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
See page 15 for button locations.  
Basic operations  
Sleep Timer [SLEEP]  
Adjusting the sound  
The system turns off automatically when the specified period of  
1 Press TREBLE/BASS to show “TRE” or  
time has passed.  
“BASS” on the display window.  
Press SLEEP.  
Each time you press the button, the indication alternates  
between “TRE” and “BASS.  
Each time you press the button, the shut-off time changes as  
follows:  
• TRE: Select this to adjust treble sound.  
• BASS: Select this to adjust bass sound.  
– – (off) Z 10 Z 20 Z 30 Z 60 Z 90 Z 120 Z 150 Z  
(back to the beginning)  
(Unit: min.)  
2 Press LEVEL +/– to adjust the level from  
Example:  
– 10 to +10 (in 2 steps).  
minutes  
NOTE  
• The adjustments take effect for all sources.  
Changing the scan mode  
The system can be accommodated to your TVs scan mode.  
To check the remaining time  
Press SLEEP once.  
To change the remaining time  
Press SLEEP repeatedly.  
NOTE  
• To use the system in the progressive mode, it is required that the  
center unit is connected to the TV by using a component video cord  
(not supplied). (See page 11.)  
To cancel  
Press SLEEP repeatedly until “SLEEP – –” appears.  
Turning off the power also cancels the Sleep Timer.  
7 While DVD or USB MEMORY is selected as the source and  
1 stPoprpeedss and hold SCAN MODE for  
Adjusting the output level of  
the subwoofer and speakers  
2 seconds.  
Currently selected scan mode appears on the display window.  
2 Press Cursor 3/2 to select the desired  
1 Press SPK LEVEL to show the target  
speaker indication on the display  
window.  
mode.  
NT. 480I: Select when your TV supports the NTSC  
interlaced video input only.  
NT. 480P: Select when your TV equipped with component  
jacks supports the NTSC progressive video input.  
PAL. 576I: Select when your TV supports the PAL interlaced  
video input only.  
Each time you press the button, the indication of the speakers  
changes as follows:  
FRNT L (Front Left speaker) Z FRNT R (Front Right  
speaker) Z CENTER (Center speaker) Z SURR L  
(Surround Left speaker) Z SURR R (Surround Right  
speaker) Z SUBWFR (Subwoofer) Z (back to the  
beginning)  
PAL. 576P: Select when your TV equipped with component  
jacks supports the PAL progressive video input.  
You can get better picture quality in the progressive mode  
(“NT. 480P” or “PAL. 576P”) than in the interlace mode  
(“NT. 480I” or “PAL. 576I”).  
2 Press LEVEL +/– to adjust the output  
level from –6 to +6.  
3 Press ENTER while the selected mode is  
NOTE  
displayed.  
When the progressive mode is selected, the PROGRESSIVE  
indicator lights on the display window.  
• You can also make adjustments by using the setup menu shown on  
the TV screen. (See page 35.)  
• The adjustments take effect for all sources other than FM/AM. For  
FM/AM, adjust the level separately by repeating the procedure above.  
NOTE  
• Changing the scan mode does not take effect when connecting the TV  
with the S-video or the composite video cord.  
• Although the picture may be distorted when you press ENTER, this is  
not a malfunction of the system.  
• There are some progressive TVs and High-Definition TVs that are  
not fully compatible with this system, resulting in an unnatural  
picture when playing back a DVD VIDEO in the progressive scan  
mode. In such a case, change the scan mode to the interlace mode.  
• All JVC progressive TVs and High-Definition TVs are fully  
compatible with this system.  
17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Playback  
• The icon such as  
shows the disc formats or file types the  
operation is available for.  
Basic playback  
IMPORTANT  
Before using the remote control for the  
following operation;  
7 To play a disc  
1 Press the desired DISC (1-5)  
1
Set the remote control mode selector  
0 on the center unit.  
to AUDIO.  
2
Press DVD or USB MEMORY.  
The system turns on and the disc tray comes  
out.  
The buttons described below are used on pages 18 to 22.  
2 Place a disc.  
Label side up  
When placing an 8 cm disc  
3 Press DISC (1-5), with SHIFT pressed.  
NOTE  
• Up to 5 discs can be loaded.  
Number  
buttons  
• You can also start playback by pressing the following buttons:  
DVD or 3 (play button) on the remote control  
DISC (1-5) 3 or 3 on the center unit  
Remote  
control mode  
selector  
• The system plays back available discs sequentially until you stop  
playback or until the disc loaded on the DISC 5 tray reaches to the  
end. However, when DVD VIDEO or DVD AUDIO is loaded in the  
system, playback of the disc next to the DVD VIDEO or DVD  
AUDIO will not start.  
Cursor  
(3/2/Y/5)/  
ENTER  
7 To play a file in a USB mass storage class device  
Press USB MEMORY.  
The operations of the files in a USB mass storage class device  
depend on the file types stored in the device.  
• For details on connecting a USB mass storage class device, see  
“Connecting a USB mass storage class device. (See page 12.)  
(play button)  
7 When playing the following files...  
For MP3/WMA files  
The file control display (see page 27) appears on the TV screen.  
For JPEG files  
Each file (still pictures) is shown on the TV screen for about 3  
seconds (slide-show). When stopping playback, the file control  
display (see page 27) appears on the TV screen.  
For ASF/MPEG-2/MPEG-1 files  
Pressing TOP MENU/PG or MENU/PL shows the file control  
display (see page 27) on the TV screen during playback.  
For DivX files  
During the readout time, “READING INDEX” may appear on  
the TV screen.  
Pressing TOP MENU/PG or MENU/PL shows the file control  
display (see page 27) on the TV screen during playback.  
NOTE  
• When several types of files are recorded on a disc/device, select  
appropriate file type on the setup menu. (See page 35.)  
• (For JPEG) The system cannot accept operations even though you  
press any buttons before the entire picture appears on the TV screen.  
7 To pause playback  
Press 8.  
To continue playback, press 3 (play button).  
7 To stop  
Press 7.  
18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
See page 18 for button locations.  
Playback  
VCD/SVCD/CD  
Example: When a CD is played back  
7 On-screen guide icons  
During DVD VIDEO playback, the following guide icons may  
appear for a while on the TV screen;  
Signal and speaker  
indicators  
Track number  
: appears at the beginning of a scene containing multi-subtitle  
languages.  
: appears at the beginning of a scene containing multi-audio  
languages.  
: appears at the beginning of a scene containing multi-angle  
views.  
(Play),  
fast-reverse),  
Elapsed playing time (hour:minute:second)  
(Pause),  
/
(Fast forward/  
/
(Slow-motion forward/  
NOTE  
reverse): appears when you perform each operation.  
• When a VCD or SVCD with PBC function is played, the elapsed  
playing time does not appear, but “PBC” appears.  
: the disc cannot accept an operation you have tried to do.  
NOTE  
MP3/WMA file  
Example: When an MP3 file is played back  
• If you do not want the on-screen guide icons to appear, see page 36.  
Signal and speaker  
7 Playback information on the display window  
Track number  
indicators  
DVD VIDEO  
Example: When a DVD VIDEO encoded with Dolby Digital 5.1 ch  
is played  
Elapsed playing time  
(hour:minute:second)  
MP3 indicator*  
Elapsed playing time (hour:minute:second)  
(during playback only)  
Chapter number  
Pressing FL DISPLAY  
Group number  
Signal and speaker indicators (See page 24.)  
Surround mode and digital signal format (See page 24.)  
Pressing FL DISPLAY  
Track number  
* WMA indicator lights for a WMA file.  
Title number  
Chapter number  
JPEG file  
Example: When slide-show is played back  
File number  
DVD AUDIO  
Signal and speaker indicators  
Pressing FL DISPLAY  
Track number  
Elapsed playing time  
(hour:minute:second)  
Group number  
File number  
Pressing FL DISPLAY  
Group number  
Track number  
19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
See page 18 for button locations.  
Playback  
ASF/MPEG-2/MPEG-1/DivX file  
Example: When an ASF file is played  
7 Disc information on the display window  
The disc indicators on the display window show the current status  
of the corresponding disc tray.  
Track number  
Signal and speaker indicators  
Example: When the discs are loaded to disc trays 1, 2 and 5, and the  
disc in the disc tray 5 is selected.  
Currently selected disc  
number  
Elapsed playing time (hour:minute:second)  
(during playback only)  
Pressing FL DISPLAY  
Currently loaded disc number  
Group number  
Track number  
7 Screen saver  
An image may burn in on a TV screen if a static picture is displayed  
for a long time. To prevent this, the system automatically dims the  
screen if a static picture is displayed for over 5 minutes (the screen  
saver function).  
• Pressing any button will cancel the screen saver function.  
• If you do not want to use the screen saver function, see page 35.  
DVD VR disc  
Example: During playback on the Original program*  
Elapsed playing time  
Chapter number  
(hour:minute:second)  
One Touch Replay  
You can move back the playback position by 10 seconds  
from the current position.  
7 During playback  
Pressing FL DISPLAY  
Press  
.
Title number  
Chapter number  
NOTE  
• This function works in the same title.  
• This function is not available during the repeat playback.  
• This feature may not work for some discs.  
Example: During playback on the Playlist*  
Fast-forward/fast-reverse  
search  
Elapsed playing time  
(hour:minute:second)  
Chapter number  
7 During playback  
On the remote control:  
Press y or 1.  
Each time you press the button, the search  
speed changes (x2, x5, x10, x20, x60).  
Pressing FL DISPLAY  
To return to normal speed playback  
Press 3 (play button).  
Playlist number  
Chapter number  
On the center unit:  
Press and hold x or 4.  
Continuously pressing x or 4 increases the fast-forward/  
reverse search speed (x5, x20).  
* Pressing TOP MENU/PG or MENU/PL, you can change the play  
mode. (See page 22.)  
NOTE  
NOTE  
• When a DVD VIDEO, DVD VR, VCD, SVCD, or ASF/MPEG-2/  
MPEG-1/DivX is played back, no sound comes out during fast-  
forward/reverse search.  
• You can change the time information mode (except for MP3/WMA/  
ASF/MPEG-2/MPEG-1/DivX). (See page 25.)  
• You can also check the playback information on the TV screen. (See  
page 24.)  
• When a DVD AUDIO, CD, or MP3/WMA is played back, sound is  
intermittent and low during fast-forward/reverse search.  
• This feature may not work for some discs/files.  
• For MP3/WMA, the search speed is not shown.  
• The search speed for DivX is y 1, y 2, y 3 for forward search,  
and 11, 12 and 13 for reverse search.  
20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
See page 18 for button locations.  
Playback  
Skip to the beginning of a  
desired selection  
Skipping at about 5-minute  
intervals  
You can skip within the file at about 5-minute intervals.  
This is useful especially when you want to skip within a  
long file.  
7 Using x/4 buttons  
7 For DVD VIDEO/DVD VR (chapter): During  
7 During playback  
playback  
7 For VCD/SVCD (track): During playback  
without PBC function  
Press Cursor 3/2.  
Each time you press the button, the playback position skips to the  
beginning of the previous or next interval. Each interval is about  
5 minutes.  
7 For DVD AUDIO/CD/MP3/WMA/JPEG/  
ASF/MPEG-2/MPEG-1/DivX (track/file): During playback or  
while stopped  
Press x or 4 repeatedly.  
NOTE  
NOTE  
• Intervals are automatically assigned from the beginning of a file.  
• This feature is available only within the same file.  
• This feature may not work for some discs/files.  
• When playing back an MP3/WMA/JPEG/ASF/MPEG-2/MPEG-1/  
DivX file, you can make operations using the file control display. (See  
page 27.)  
• This feature may not work for some discs/files.  
Locating a desired title/group  
using number buttons  
7 Using number buttons on the remote control  
7 For DVD VIDEO/DVD VR (title, chapter):  
While stopped, the title number is selected.  
During playback, the chapter number is selected.  
7 For DVD AUDIO (track):  
7 During playback or while stopped  
1 Press TITLE/GROUP.  
“– –” is shown in the title/group display area  
in the display window.  
During playback or while stopped  
7 For VCD/SVCD (track):  
Example: During DVD VIDEO playback  
During playback or while stopped without PBC function  
7 For CD/MP3/WMA/JPEG/ASF/MPEG-2/MPEG-1/DivX  
(track/file):  
During playback or while stopped  
Press number buttons (0-10, h10) to  
2 While the display window shows “– –,  
use number buttons (0-10, h10) to  
enter the desired title or group  
select the desired number.  
• For details on using the number buttons, see “How to use the  
number buttons” below.  
number.  
How to use the number buttons  
The system starts playback from the first chapter/track/file of  
the selected title/group.  
• For details on using the number buttons, see “How to use the  
number buttons” on the left column.  
To select 3:  
Press 3.  
To select 10: Press 10.  
To select 14: Press h10, 1, then 4.  
To select 24: Press h10, 2, then 4.  
To select 40: Press h10, 4, then 0.  
To select 114: Press h10, h10, 1, 1, then 4.  
NOTE  
• When locating a title of a DVD VR disc, the PG or PL indicator may  
light on the display window.  
• This feature may not work for some discs/files.  
21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
See page 18 for button locations.  
Playback  
Playing back a bonus group  
Selecting the desired title/  
playlist from the control  
display  
Some DVD AUDIOs have a special group called “bonus  
group” whose contents are not open to the public. The  
bonus group is always assigned to the last group of a disc. To  
play back a bonus group, you have to enter the specific “key  
number” (a password). The way of getting the key number depends  
on the disc. After getting the key number, you can play back the  
bonus group by following the procedure below.  
7 During playback or while stopped  
DVD  
VR  
1 Press TOP MENU/PG or MENU/PL.  
The control display is shown on the TV screen, and the system  
starts playback of the first title/playlist.  
7 While the BONUS indicator lights up on the display window  
• The PLAY LIST is shown only when the playlist is on the  
DVD VR disc.  
1 Select the bonus group.  
For selecting the group, see “Locating a desired title/group  
using number buttons” described on page 21.  
The key number entry indication appears.  
TOP MENU/PG: shows the ORIGINAL PROGRAM.  
Example:  
On the TV  
On the display window  
*1: Title number  
2 Press number buttons (0-9) to enter the  
*2: Recording date  
key number, then press ENTER.  
When you enter the correct key number, playback starts and  
the BONUS indicator goes off.  
*3: Recording source (TV station, the input terminal of the  
recording equipment etc.)  
*4: Start time of recording  
*5: Title of the original program/playlist (The title may not be  
displayed depending on the recording equipment.)  
*6: Current title  
• If you enter a wrong number, reenter the correct number.  
To clear the key number entry  
Perform whichever one of the following:  
• Press 7.  
MENU/PL: shows the PLAY LIST.  
Example:  
• Open the disc tray.  
Turn off the system.  
NOTE  
• In Random Playback, tracks in the bonus group are not played back.  
*7: Playlist number  
*8: Creating date of playlists  
*9: Number of chapters  
*10: Total playing time  
*11: Current playlist  
2 Press Cursor Y/5 to select the desired  
title/playlist.  
The system starts playback of the selected title/playlist.  
To clear the control display  
Press ENTER.  
About the play mode on a DVD VR disc  
• Original program (ORIGINAL PROGRAM):  
The system can play back the original picture in the recorded  
order.  
• Playlist (PLAY LIST):  
The system can play back the playlist edited by the recording  
equipment.  
22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Advanced operations  
• The icon such as  
shows the disc formats or file types the  
operation is available for.  
Using the surround mode  
IMPORTANT  
Before using the remote control for the following  
operation;  
You can enjoy more realistic sound field than a stereo sound by  
using the surround mode.  
• Set the remote control mode selector to AUDIO.  
• There are exceptions in the operation mentioned  
above. In such a case, follow each instruction.  
7 Auto Surround (AUTO SUR)  
Used to reproduce the sound as it is recorded without any  
conversion (downmixing or simulation, etc.). For example, a  
multichannel source is automatically reproduced in multichannel  
audio.  
The buttons described below are used on pages 23 to 33.  
7 Dolby Surround  
Dolby Pro Logic II*  
1
Dolby Pro Logic II has a newly developed multichannel playback  
format to decode all 2 channel sources — stereo source and Dolby  
Surround encoded source — into a 5.1 channel.  
Dolby Pro Logic II has two modes — Movie mode and Music mode:  
• Pro Logic II Movie (MOVIE)  
Suitable for reproduction of Dolby Surround encoded sources  
Number  
buttons  
Remote  
controlmode  
selector  
bearing the mark  
• Pro Logic II Music (MUSIC)  
.
Suitable for reproduction of any 2 channel stereo music sources.  
1
Dolby Digital*  
Used to reproduce multichannel soundtracks of the software  
Cursor  
(3/2/Y/5)/  
ENTER  
encoded with Dolby Digital (  
).  
• There are other encoding formats of digital surround introduced  
by Dolby Laboratories, such as Dolby Digital EX.  
(play button)  
2
7 DTS Digital Surround*  
Used to reproduce multichannel soundtracks of the software  
encoded with DTS Digital Surround (  
).  
DTS Digital Surround (DTS) is another discrete multichannel  
digital audio format available on CD and DVD software.  
• There are other encoding formats of multi-channel digital  
surround introduced by Digital Theater Systems, Inc., such as  
DTS-ES, DTS 96/24.  
Available Surround modes for each input signal  
The marks show available surround modes.  
Mode Surround  
off  
Auto  
DTS Digital Linear Packed  
Dolby Surround  
DSP  
Surround  
Surround  
DTS  
PCM  
PCM  
3
3
3
3
Signal  
OFF  
AUTO SUR MOVIE* MUSIC* DOLBY D  
LPCM PPCM STADIUM* ALL ST*  
Dolby D  
(Multichannel)  
Dolby D  
(2 channel)  
DTS Digital Surround  
(Multichannel)  
DTS Digital Surround  
(2 channel)  
Linear/Packed PCM  
(Multichannel)  
Analog (VCR) or Linear/  
Packed PCM (2 channel)  
1
*
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. “Dolby, Pro Logic, MLP Lossless, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of  
Dolby Laboratories.  
“DTS” and “DTS Digital Surround” are registered trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc.  
You can select these modes by pressing SURROUND. (See page 24.)  
2
3
*
*
23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
See page 23 for button locations.  
Advanced operations  
7 DSP  
7 When playing back digital multichannel software (except  
• STADIUM  
while OFF is selected)  
STADIUM mode adds clarity and spreads the sound, like in an  
outdoor stadium.  
• All Channel Stereo  
The appropriate multichannel surround mode (Dolby Digital, DTS  
Digital Surround or Linear/Packed PCM) is automatically selected.  
All Channel Stereo (ALL ST) mode can reproduce a larger stereo  
sound field using all the connected (and activated) speakers.  
All Channel Stereo can be used while reproducing 2 channel stereo  
source.  
7 When playing back a 2 channel source  
You can select either Dolby Pro Logic II (MOVIE/MUSIC) or the  
DSP mode.  
Press SURROUND repeatedly to select the  
Normal stereo sound  
All Channel Stereo  
desired mode.  
The surround mode is turned on and the current surround mode  
appears on the display window.  
Each time you press the button, the surround mode changes.  
For details on each mode, see Available Surround modes for each  
input signal”. (See page 23.)  
To turn off the surround mode  
7 Indicators on the display window  
Digital signal format indicators  
Press SURROUND repeatedly until “OFF”  
appears on the display window.  
PPCM:  
Lights when DVD AUDIO packed PCM signals  
comes in.  
Storing adjustments — auto memory  
When you turn the power off, the system memorizes the current  
surround mode. The memorized mode is automatically recalled  
when you turn the power on.  
LPCM:  
GD:  
C:  
Lights when Linear PCM signal comes in.  
Lights when Dolby Digital signals come in.  
Lights when DTS Digital (Surround) signals come  
in.  
NOTE  
No indication: No digital signal indicator lights when analog  
signals come in.  
• For a down-mixing prohibited DVD AUDIO disc, the system  
continues to output multi-channel signals with “MULTI CH” shown  
on the display window even if the surround mode is turned off during  
playback. On the other hand, the system outputs only the front left  
and right channel signals with “LR ONLY” shown on the display  
window when you start playback with the surround mode having  
been set to “OFF” or “H. PHONE”.  
Dolby Surround mode indicator  
GPLII:  
Lights when Dolby Pro Logic II mode is activated.  
Surround indicator  
SURR:  
Lights when the surround mode is activated.  
• For ASF, MPEG-2, MPEG-1 and DivX (except DivX version 6), the  
surround mode takes no effects.  
Source signal indicators, etc.  
Light to indicate the incoming signals.  
a: Lights when the left channel signal comes  
in.  
Using the on-screen bar  
You can check disc information and you can use some functions  
using the on-screen bar.  
b: Lights when the center channel signal comes in.  
c: Lights when the right channel signal comes in.  
d: Lights when the LFE channel signal comes in.  
g: Lights when the surround left channel signal comes in.  
i: Lights when the surround right channel signal comes in.  
h: Lights when the monaural surround channel signal or 2  
channel Dolby Surround signal comes in.  
SW (Subwoofer): Always lights.  
Showing the on-screen bar  
7 Whenever a disc is loaded  
Press ON SCREEN.  
Each time you press the button, the on-screen bar  
changes as follows on the TV screen.  
The channel with “ ” shows that the corresponding speakers are  
reproducing the channels’ sound.  
If the channels’ sound decoded into 5.1 channel is reproduced, only  
Example: During DVD VIDEO playback  
” lights.  
Selecting the surround mode  
The system is set up to automatically select the optimal surround  
mode for input signal from digital multichannel software.  
When playing back a 2 channel source, you can select the desired  
surround mode manually.  
OFF  
(The on-screen bar disappears)  
IMPORTANT  
Before using the remote control for the following  
operation;  
(back to the beginning)  
• Set the remote control mode selector to AUDIO.  
• The currently selected item shows green.  
24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
See page 23 for button locations.  
Advanced operations  
7 Shows playback status.  
: appears during playback.  
7 Contents of the on-screen bar during playback  
DVD VIDEO  
/
/
: appears during fast forward/reverse.  
: appears during playback in forward slow-motion/  
reverse slow-motion.  
: appears when paused.  
: appears when stopped.  
8 Select this to change time information (F). See “Changing the  
time information” below.  
DVD AUDIO  
9 Select this for Repeat Playback. (See page 32.)  
0 Select this for time search function. (See page 27.)  
K For DVD VIDEO and DVD VR: Select this for chapter search  
function. (See page 26.)  
For DVD AUDIO: Select this for track search function. (See page  
26.)  
L Select this to change audio language or channel. (See page 29.)  
M Select this to change subtitle language and subpicture. (See page  
28.)  
VCD  
N Select this to change view angle. (See page 28.)  
O Select this to change the page. (See page 30.)  
P Shows Playback mode status.  
PROGRAM: appears during Program Playback. (See page 31.)  
RANDOM: appears during Random Playback. (See page 32.)  
Q Shows Repeat mode status. (See page 32.)  
SVCD  
Changing the time information  
You can change the time information in the on-  
screen bar on the TV screen and the display  
window of the center unit.  
CD  
7 During playback  
1 Press ON SCREEN twice.  
The on-screen bar appears on the TV screen.  
2 Press Cursor 3/2 to highlight  
.
DVD VR disc  
3 Press ENTER repeatedly to select the  
desired information.  
Example: When elapsed playing time of disc is selected.  
ASF/MPEG-2/MPEG-1/DivX  
7 DVD VIDEO/DVD AUDIO/DVD VR  
• TIME: Elapsed playing time of current chapter/track  
• REM: Remaining time of current chapter/track  
• TOTAL: Elapsed time of Title/Group/Program  
T. REM: Remaining time of Title/Group/Program  
1 Shows disc type.  
7 VCD/SVCD/CD  
2 Shows audio information.  
• TIME: Elapsed playing time of current track  
• REM: Remaining time of current track  
• TOTAL: Elapsed time of disc  
3 Shows disc number.  
4 For DVD VIDEO: Shows current title number.  
For DVD AUDIO: Shows current group number.  
For DVD VR: Shows current play mode (PG: for Original  
program, PL: for Playlist) and title number.  
5 For DVD VIDEO and DVD VR: Shows current chapter number.  
For other type of discs: Shows current track number.  
6 Shows time information. See “Changing the time information”  
on the right column.  
T. REM: Remaining time of disc  
4 Press ON SCREEN.  
The on-screen bar disappears.  
NOTE  
• When playing back DVD VR, “TIME” and “REM” cannot be shown.  
25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
See page 23 for button locations.  
Advanced operations  
Locating a desired chapter/track using the on-  
screen bar  
Playing from a specified  
position on a disc  
You can start playing a title, chapter or track you specify. You can  
also play a disc from specified time.  
7 During playback  
1 Press ON SCREEN twice.  
The on-screen bar appears on the TV screen.  
Locating a desired scene from the DVD menu  
2 Press Cursor 3/2 to highlight  
/
.
DVD VIDEOs and DVD AUDIOs generally have their  
own menus which show disc contents and you can  
display them on the TV screen. You can locate a desired  
scene by using these menus.  
3 Press ENTER.  
Example: During DVD VIDEO playback  
7 Whenever a DVD VIDEO or DVD AUDIO is loaded  
1 Press TOP MENU/PG or MENU/PL.  
The menu appears on the TV screen.  
4 Press number buttons (0-9) to enter the  
desired chapter number.  
Example:  
Normally, a DVD VIDEO or DVD AUDIO which contains  
more than one title will have a “top” menu which lists the titles.  
Press TOP MENU/PG to show the title menu.  
Some discs may also have a different menu which is shown by  
pressing MENU/PL.  
See the instructions for each discs regarding its particular  
menu.  
To select 8:  
Press 8.  
To select 10: Press 1, then 0.  
To select 20: Press 2, then 0.  
To select 37: Press 3, then 7.  
To correct a misentry  
Repeat step 4.  
2 Use Cursor 3/2/Y/5 to select a  
desired item.  
5 Press ENTER.  
3 Press ENTER.  
• With some discs, you can also select items by entering the  
corresponding number using number buttons.  
6 Press ON SCREEN.  
The on-screen bar disappears.  
NOTE  
• You can select up to the 99th chapter/track.  
NOTE  
• This feature may not work for some discs.  
Locating a desired scene using a VCD/SVCD menu  
with PBC  
A VCD or SVCD recorded with PBC has its own menus  
such as a list of contained songs. You can locate a  
specific scene by using these menus.  
7 During playback with PBC function  
1 Press RETURN repeatedly until the  
menu appears on the TV screen.  
2 Press number buttons (1-10, h10) to  
select the number of the desired item.  
• For details on using the number buttons, see “How to use the  
number buttons. (See page 21.)  
To return to the menu  
Press RETURN repeatedly until the menu screen appears.  
When “NEXT” or “PREVIOUS” is shown on the TV screen:  
To go to the next page, press x.  
To return to the previous page, press 4.  
NOTE  
• If you want to play a PBC-compatible VCD/SVCD without using the  
PBC function, perform any of the following:  
– Start playback by pressing number buttons while stopped.  
– Press x repeatedly until the desired track number is displayed,  
then start playback by pressing 3 (play button). The track number  
appears on the display window instead of “PBC”.  
• To activate the PBC function when playing a PBC-compatible VCD/  
SVCD without using the PBC function, perform any of the following:  
– Press TOP MENU/PG or MENU/PL.  
– Press 7 twice to stop playback, then press 3 (play button).  
26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
See page 23 for button locations.  
Advanced operations  
Locating a desired position by specifying the time  
Using the file control display  
You can search and play desired groups and tracks/  
files using the file control display on the TV  
screen.  
7 For DVD VIDEO/DVD AUDIO/DVD VR:  
During playback  
7 For VCD/SVCD: While stopped or during  
playback without PBC function  
7 For CD: During playback or while stopped  
Example: When the source is DVD.  
1
Current group/total group  
number  
Playback mode* (PROGRAM,  
RANDOM, REPEAT)  
7 When specifying the elapsed playing time from the  
beginning of the disc  
Perform the following procedure while stopped.  
Track information (for MP3/  
WMA only)  
Elapsed playing time of current  
track (except for JPEG)  
7 When specifying the elapsed playing time from the  
beginning of the current title/track  
Perform the following procedure during playback.  
2
*
1 Press ON SCREEN twice.  
The on-screen bar appears on the TV screen.  
2 Press Cursor 3/2 to highlight  
3 Press ENTER.  
.
4 Use number buttons (0-9) to enter the  
time.  
Example: To play back from a point 2 (hours): 34 (minutes): 08  
Current group  
Current track (file)  
(seconds) elapsed  
Current track (file) / total track (file)  
number on current group  
Total track (file)  
number on disc  
Press 2  
Press 4  
Press 8  
Press 3  
Press 0  
Playback status  
1
2
*
(For JPEG/ASF/MPEG-2/MPEG-1/DivX) The Program and  
Random mode are not available.  
When the source is USB MEMORY, USB” appears.  
*
To cancel a misentry  
The file control display appears automatically during playback  
(MP3/WMA) or while stopped.  
Press Cursor 2 repeatedly.  
5 Press ENTER.  
7 For MP3/WMA: During playback or while stopped  
7 For JPEG/ASF/MPEG-2/MPEG-1/DivX: While stopped  
6 Press ON SCREEN.  
The on-screen bar disappears.  
1 Press Cursor 3/2/Y/5 to select the  
desired group/track/file.  
2 Press 3 (play button) or ENTER.  
• Track playback/slide-show starts from the selected track/file.  
• When you press ENTER for JPEG, only the selected file is  
played back.  
NOTE  
• (For MP3/WMA) During playback, you can change the playback  
track/file by pressing x/4 or Cursor 5/Y.  
• You can also check playback information on the display window. (See  
page 19.)  
• Some group, track and file names may not be displayed correctly  
depending on recording conditions.  
• The order of groups, tracks, and files may be displayed differently  
from the order displayed on your personal computer.  
27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
See page 23 for button locations.  
Advanced operations  
NOTE  
Resume Playback  
• During DVD AUDIO playback, this feature is available only for the  
video part.  
When Resume Playback is set to “ON” (see page  
36) and you stop playback by the following  
operations, the position where playback has been  
stopped is stored. (The RESUME indicator lights  
on the display window.)  
Selecting the subtitle  
7 During playback of a disc/file containing  
Turning off the power (See page 15.)  
• Pressing 7 once  
subtitles in several languages  
• Changing the source (See page 16.)  
When using the SUBTITLE button:  
To start playback from the stored position  
Press 3 (play button) or corresponding source button (DVD or USB  
MEMORY).  
• There may be a case when 3 (play button) does not work after  
changing the source. In this case, select DVD or USB MEMORY  
as a source.  
1 Press SUBTITLE.  
Example (DVD VIDEO): “ENGLISH” is selected out of 3  
subtitle languages recorded.  
• Pressing DISC (1-5) (with SHIFT pressed) on the remote control or  
DISC (1-5) 3 on the center unit also resumes disc playback.  
To clear the stored position  
Press 7 again.  
2 Press Cursor Y/5 to select the desired  
subtitle.  
• Opening the disc tray with the playback disc or disconnecting the  
USB mass storage class device also clears the stored position.  
For DVD VR  
• Pressing SUBTITLE activates the subtitles (subpictures)  
regardless of whether the subtitles are recorded or not.  
(Subpictures will not change if no subpicture is recorded.)  
NOTE  
• (For DivX) The beginning of a scene where playback has been  
stopped may be stored.  
For SVCD  
• An SVCD can contain up to four subtitles. Pressing SUBTITLE  
changes the subtitles regardless of whether the subtitles are  
recorded or not. (Subtitles will not change if no subtitle is  
recorded.)  
Selecting a view angle  
7 During playback of a disc containing multi-view  
angles  
When using the on-screen bar:  
1 Press ON SCREEN twice.  
When using the ANGLE button:  
The on-screen bar appears on the TV screen.  
1 Press ANGLE with SHIFT pressed.  
2 Press Cursor 3/2 to highlight  
3 Press ENTER.  
.
Example: The first view angle is selected out of 3 view angles  
recorded.  
4 Press Cursor Y/5 repeatedly to select  
2 Press ANGLE repeatedly with SHIFT  
pressed, or press Cursor Y/5 to select  
the desired view angle.  
the desired subtitle.  
5 Press ENTER.  
When using the on-screen bar:  
6 Press ON SCREEN.  
The on-screen bar disappears.  
1 Press ON SCREEN twice.  
The on-screen bar appears on the TV screen.  
NOTE  
• To clear the subtitle, press SUBTITLE. Each time you press SUBTITLE,  
subtitle appears and disappears alternately.  
2 Press Cursor 3/2 to highlight  
3 Press ENTER.  
.
• Some subtitle or audio languages are abbreviated in the pop-up  
window. See “The language codes list”. (See page 34.)  
• During DVD AUDIO playback, this feature is available only for the  
video part.  
• For DivX, you cannot operate this procedure using the on-screen bar.  
4 Press Cursor Y/5 to select the desired  
view angle.  
5 Press ENTER.  
6 Press ON SCREEN.  
The on-screen bar disappears.  
28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
See page 23 for button locations.  
Advanced operations  
Selecting the audio  
Special picture playback  
7 During playback of a disc/file containing audio  
Frame-by-frame playback  
in several languages  
7 During playback  
When using the AUDIO button:  
Press 8 repeatedly.  
Each time you press the button, the still  
picture advances by one frame.  
1 Press AUDIO.  
Example (DVD VIDEO): “ENGLISH” is selected out of 3 audio  
languages recorded.  
To return to normal playback  
Press 3 (play button).  
Playing back in slow-motion  
7 During playback  
2 Press AUDIO repeatedly or press Cursor  
Y/5 to select the desired audio.  
1 Press 8 at the point where  
you want to start playback  
When using the on-screen bar:  
in slow-motion from.  
1 Press ON SCREEN twice.  
The system pauses playback.  
The on-screen bar appears on the TV screen.  
2 Press SLOW 9.  
2 Press Cursor 3/2 to highlight  
3 Press ENTER.  
.
Playback in forward slow-motion starts.  
For DVD VIDEO/DVD AUDIO only:  
To play back in reverse slow-motion, press SLOW (.  
Each time you press the button, the playback speed becomes  
faster (1/32, 1/16, 1/8, 1/4, 1/2).  
Example: On the TV  
4 Press Cursor Y/5 to select the desired  
audio.  
5 Press ENTER.  
To return to normal playback  
Press 3 (play button).  
6 Press ON SCREEN.  
The on-screen bar disappears.  
NOTE  
• Sound cannot be heard during slow-motion playback.  
• During DVD AUDIO playback, this feature is available only for the  
video part.  
NOTE  
• Some subtitle or audio languages are abbreviated in the pop-up  
window. See “The language codes list”. (See page 34.)  
• “ST”, “L”, or “R” is displayed when playing a VCD respectively  
representing “stereo”, “left sound” and “right sound”.  
When playing a SVCD, “ST1”, “ST2”, “L1”, “R1”, “L2”, or “R2” is  
displayed.  
• For DivX, you cannot operate this procedure using the on-screen bar.  
29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
See page 23 for button locations.  
Advanced operations  
Selecting browsable still picture recorded on DVD  
AUDIO  
Most DVD AUDIOs include browsable still pictures (B.S.P.),  
which usually appear by turns automatically during  
playback according to the playback sequence. You can  
change the picture (turn the page) manually when the current  
group/track has selectable pictures (pages).  
Changing the VFP setting  
The VFP (Video Fine Processor) function enables  
you to adjust the picture character according to the  
type of programming, picture tone or personal  
preference.  
7 During playback  
1 Press VFP.  
7 During playback and while the B.S.P. indicator lights up on the  
The current VFP settings appear on the TV screen.  
display window  
Example:  
When using the PAGE button:  
Press PAGE repeatedly to select a desired  
still picture.  
When using the on-screen bar:  
1 Press ON SCREEN twice.  
The on-screen bar appears on the TV screen.  
2 Press Cursor 3/2 to highlight  
3 Press ENTER.  
.
2 Press Cursor 3/2 repeatedly to select  
the VFP mode.  
• NORMAL: Normally select this.  
• CINEMA: Suitable for movies.  
When you select “NORMALor “CINEMA, press VFP to  
complete the setting.  
• USER 1 and USER 2: You can adjust parameters that affect  
picture appearance.  
4 Press Cursor 5/Y to select the desired  
still picture.  
Only when selecting “USER 1” or “USER 2” in step 2, proceed  
to perform the following operation;  
5 Press ENTER.  
3 Press Cursor Y/5 repeatedly to select  
6 Press ON SCREEN.  
The on-screen bar disappears.  
a parameter you want to adjust.  
Adjust gradually and confirm picture appearance results are as  
preferred.  
Zooming in  
• GAMMA: Controls brightness of neutral tints while  
maintaining brightness of dark and bright portions (–3 to  
+3).  
7 During playback or while paused  
1 Press ZOOM with SHIFT  
pressed.  
• BRIGHTNESS: Controls screen brightness (–8 to +8).  
• CONTRAST: Controls screen contrast (–7 to +7).  
• SATURATION: Controls screen color depth (–7 to +7).  
• TINT: Controls screen tint (–7 to +7).  
Each time you press ZOOM with SHIFT  
pressed, scene magnification changes.  
• SHARPNESS: Controls screen sharpness (–8 to +8).  
2 While zoomed in, press Cursor 3/2/  
4 Press ENTER.  
Y/5 to move zoom-in area.  
Example:  
To return to normal playback  
Press ZOOM repeatedly with SHIFT pressed, to select ZOOM OFF.  
NOTE  
• The number of the magnification steps varies depending on the disc  
type.  
• During slide-show playback of JPEG, zooming in is not available. In  
such a case, press 8 to pause slide-show playback, then zoom in.  
• During DVD AUDIO playback, this feature is available only for the  
video part.  
5 Press Cursor Y/5 to change the  
setting.  
6 Press ENTER.  
The current VFP settings appear again.  
7 Repeat steps 3 to 6 to adjust other  
• During playback, there may be a case where Cursor (3/2/Y/5)  
does not work in step 2 above.  
parameters.  
8 Press VFP.  
NOTE  
• Although the setting display disappears in the middle of the  
procedure, the setting at that time will be stored.  
30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
See page 23 for button locations.  
Advanced operations  
3 Press 3 (play button).  
Program Playback  
7 While stopped  
If all of the programmed tracks/files have been played back,  
playback stops and the program window appears again. Note  
that program setting remains.  
1 Press PLAY MODE  
To check the program contents  
During playback, press 7. Playback stops and the program window  
repeatedly until program  
appears.  
window appears on the TV screen.  
To quit the Program mode  
The PRG indicator lights on the display window.  
While stopped, press PLAY MODE repeatedly until both program  
window and  
disappear from the TV screen.  
NOTE  
• When the source is USB MEMORY, Program Playback does not  
work.  
• There may be a case where bonus group on a DVD AUDIO cannot be  
played.  
• The Resume function cannot be used with Program Playback.  
DISC (1-5) on the remote control and DISC (1-5) 3 on the center unit  
do not work during Program Playback.  
• Program Playback may not work for some discs.  
2 Follow the instructions that appear on  
the TV screen to program the desired  
chapters/tracks.  
• For details on using the number buttons, see “How to use the  
number buttons. (See page 21.)  
• The contents numbers that you have to specify for  
programming varies depending on the disc/file type:  
– DVD VIDEO: Titles and chapters  
– VCD, SVCD, CD: Tracks  
– DVD AUDIO, MP3, WMA: Groups and tracks  
• Before you program the tracks in bonus group on a DVD  
AUDIO, perform the procedure of “Playing back a bonus  
group” (see page 22) to turn off the BONUS indicator on the  
display window.  
You can specify the chapters/tracks whose number is up to  
99.  
• There may be a case that the group or title number can be  
entered even for discs that contain no groups or titles. In such  
a case, press ENTER to proceed to the Track/Chapter column.  
• When you press ENTER instead of the number buttons in the  
Track/Chapter column, ALLappears and all the tracks or  
chapters on the selected group or title are programmed as a  
step.  
To clear the programs one by one from the last entered  
number  
Press CANCEL repeatedly.  
To clear all programs  
Press and hold CANCEL.  
You can also clear the program by turning off the system.  
31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
See page 23 for button locations.  
Advanced operations  
Display  
window  
TV screen  
Meanings  
Random Playback  
Repeats the current group for  
DVD AUDIO/MP3/WMA/  
JPEG/ASF/MPEG-2/MPEG-1/  
DivX.  
You can play titles or tracks on a disc in random  
order.  
REPEAT GROUP  
7 While stopped  
1 Press PLAY MODE repeatedly until  
Repeats the current title for  
DVD VIDEO.  
appears on the TV screen.  
(For DVD VR) Repeats the  
current title for Original  
program.  
The RND indicator lights on the display window.  
2 Press 3 (play button).  
• When more than one discs are loaded, the system starts  
Random Playback of the next disc after completing current  
disc playback.  
(For DVD VR) Repeats the  
current playlist for Playlist.  
Repeats all titles and tracks on  
the current disc for DVD VR/  
VCD/SVCD/CD/MP3/WMA/  
JPEG/ASF/MPEG-2/MPEG-1/  
DivX.  
To quit Random mode  
While stopped, press PLAY MODE repeatedly until both program  
REPEAT DISC  
DISC  
ALL  
window and  
disappear from the TV screen.  
You can also clear the Random mode by turning off the system.  
NOTE  
Repeats all the available discs/  
files.  
• When the source is USB MEMORY, Random Playback does not  
work.  
REPEAT ALL  
• The same title/track will not be played back more than once during  
Random Playback.  
,
Repeats the current track for  
DVD AUDIO/VCD/SVCD/  
CD/MP3/WMA/ASF/MPEG-  
2/MPEG-1/DivX.  
REPEAT TRACK,  
REPEAT STEP  
1
Repeat Playback  
Repeats the current chapter for  
DVD VIDEO/DVD VR.  
,
Repeating the current selection or all discs  
Repeat mode is off.  
The system plays back the disc/  
file normally.  
No  
indication  
7 For DVD VIDEO/DVD VR: During playback  
7 For VCD/SVCD: During playback without PBC  
function or while stopped  
7 For DVD AUDIO/CD/MP3/JPEG/ASF/  
MPEG-2/MPEG-1/DivX: During playback or  
while stopped  
NOTE  
• When DVD VIDEO or DVD AUDIO is loaded in the system,  
playback of the disc next to the DVD VIDEO or DVD AUDIO will  
/REPEAT ALL on the TV screen or  
ALL in the display window is shown.  
• For DVD VIDEO and DVD AUDIO, REPEAT ALL and REPEAT  
DISC may not be available depending on the disc.  
not start, although  
When using the REPEAT button:  
Press REPEAT.  
When using the on-screen bar (except for MP3/WMA/JPEG/  
ASF/MPEG-2/MPEG-1/DivX):  
1 Press ON SCREEN twice.  
Repeat mode indicator  
The on-screen bar appears on the TV screen.  
Each time you press REPEAT, the Repeat mode changes.  
2 Press Cursor 3/2 to highlight  
3 Press ENTER.  
.
4 Press Cursor Y/5 repeatedly to select  
the Repeat mode.  
5 Press ENTER.  
6 Press ON SCREEN.  
The on-screen bar disappears.  
To cancel Repeat Playback  
Select “OFF” in step 4.  
32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
See page 23 for button locations.  
Advanced operations  
Repeating a desired part [A-B Repeat]  
You can repeat playback of a desired part by  
specifying the beginning (point A) and ending  
(point B).  
Tray lock  
You can lock the tray and prohibit unwanted disc ejection.  
On the center unit ONLY:  
7 During playback  
7 While the system is turned off  
1 Press ON SCREEN twice.  
The on-screen bar appears on the TV screen.  
2 Press Cursor 3/2 to highlight  
3 Press ENTER.  
.
Press and hold  
• “LOCKED” appears on the display window.  
• If you try to eject the disc, “LOCKED” appears to indicate that  
the tray is locked.  
4 Press Cursor Y/5 repeatedly to select  
To cancel  
“A-B”.  
Carry out the same operation again.  
• “UNLOCKED” appears on the display window.  
5 Press ENTER at the beginning of the  
part you want to repeat (point A).  
Setting the sound balance  
The repeat mode indicator “  
window.  
” appears on the display  
IMPORTANT  
Before using the remote control for the following  
operation;  
• Set the remote control mode selector to AUDIO.  
6 Press ENTER at the end of the part you  
want to repeat (point B).  
The repeat mode indicator on the display window changes to  
NOTE  
” and A-B Repeat Playback starts.  
• Before you start operation; There is a time limit when  
doing the following steps. If the setting is canceled before you finish,  
1staPrtrfreomssstSepE1TagTaiInN. G.  
7 Press ON SCREEN.  
The on-screen bar disappears.  
To cancel  
Select “OFF” in step 4, then press ENTER.  
NOTE  
• When playing back a DVD VIDEO/DVD VR, A-B Repeat Playback is  
possible only within the same title.  
• “A-B” cannot be selected during Program and Random Playback.  
• “A-B” cannot be selected during playback with PBC function.  
2 Press Cursor 3/2 to make an  
adjustment or selection.  
You can adjust the balance of the sound between “R (right)  
–21” and “L (left) –21. To set the balance to normal, select  
“CNTR (center).  
The adjustment is set and the display automatically disappears  
a few seconds later.  
33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting DVD preferences  
NOTE  
Using the setup menus  
• See the following “The language codes list” for the code of each  
language, such as “AA”, etc.  
You can change the language used in the setup menus. See “Menu  
description” below.  
The language codes list  
Basic operation on the setup menus  
AA Afar  
IK Inupiak  
RN Kirundi  
IMPORTANT  
Before using the remote control for the  
following operation;  
AB Abkhazian  
AF Afrikaans  
AM Ameharic  
AR Arabic  
AS Assamese  
AY Aymara  
AZ Azerbaijani  
BA Bashkir  
BE Byelorussian  
BG Bulgarian  
BH Bihari  
BI Bislama  
BN Bengali, Bangla  
BO Tibetan  
BR Breton  
CA Catalan  
CO Corsican  
CS Czech  
IN Indonesian  
RO Rumanian  
RW Kinyarwanda  
SA Sanskrit  
SD Sindhi  
SG Sangho  
IS  
IW Hebrew  
JI Yiddish  
Icelandic  
1
Set the remote control mode selector  
to AUDIO.  
JW Javanese  
KA Georgian  
KK Kazakh  
KL Greenlandic  
KM Cambodian  
KN Kannada  
KO Korean (KOR)  
KS Kashmiri  
KU Kurdish  
2
Press DVD or USB MEMORY.  
SH Serbo-Croatian  
SI  
Singhalese  
SK Slovak  
SL Slovenian  
SM Samoan  
SN Shona  
SO Somali  
SQ Albanian  
SR Serbian  
SS Siswati  
ST Sesotho  
SU Sundanese  
SV Swedish  
SW Swahili  
TA Tamil  
Cursor  
(3/2/Y/5)/  
ENTER  
KY Kirghiz  
LA Latin  
LN Lingala  
LO Laothian  
LT Lithuanian  
LV Latvian, Lettish  
MG Malagasy  
MI Maori  
MK Macedonian  
ML Malayalam  
MN Mongolian  
MO Moldavian  
MR Marathi  
MS Malay (MAY)  
MT Maltese  
MY Burmese  
NA Nauru  
NE Nepali  
NL Dutch  
NO Norwegian  
OC Occitan  
OM (Afan) Oromo  
OR Oriya  
PA Panjabi  
PL Polish  
PS Pashto, Pushto  
PT Portuguese  
QU Quechua  
RM Rhaeto-Romance  
7 While stopped  
CY Welsh  
1 Press SET UP.  
DA Danish  
DZ Bhutani  
EL Greek  
EO Esperanto  
ET Estonian  
EU Basque  
FA Persian  
FI Finnish  
FJ Fiji  
FO Faroese  
FY Frisian  
GA Irish  
GD Scots Gaelic  
GL Galician  
GN Guarani  
GU Gujarati  
HA Hausa  
TE Telugu  
TG Tajik  
TH Thai  
TI Tigrinya  
TK Turkmen  
TL Tagalog  
TN Setswana  
TO Tonga  
TR Turkish  
TS Tsonga  
TT Tatar  
TW Twi  
UK Ukrainian  
UR Urdu  
UZ Uzbek  
VI Vietnamese  
VO Volapuk  
WO Wolof  
XH Xhosa  
YO Yoruba  
ZU Zulu  
2 Follow the instructions that appear on  
the TV screen.  
Menu description  
: Language menu (LANGUAGE)  
HI Hindi  
HR Croatian  
HU Hungarian  
HY Armenian  
IA Interlingua  
IE Interlingue  
7 MENU LANGUAGE  
Some DVDs have their own menus in multiple languages.  
• Select the initial language*.  
7 AUDIO LANGUAGE  
Some DVDs have multiple audio languages.  
• Select the initial audio language*.  
7 SUBTITLE  
Some DVDs have multiple subtitle languages.  
• Select the initial subtitle language*.  
7 ON SCREEN LANGUAGE  
Select the language shown on the TV screen when operating this  
system.  
* When the language you have selected is not recorded to a disc,  
the original language is automatically used as the initial language.  
34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting DVD preferences  
: Picture menu (PICTURE)  
: Audio menu (AUDIO)  
7 D. RANGE COMPRESSION  
7 MONITOR TYPE  
(Dynamic range compression)  
You can select the monitor type to match your TV when you play  
DVDs recorded in the picture’s height/width ratio of 16:9.  
16:9/16:9 MULTI (Wide television conversion)  
Select this when the aspect ratio of your TV is fixed on 16:9 (wide  
TV).  
You can enjoy low level recorded sound clearly at night even at a low  
volume when listening to the sound with Dolby Digital.  
• AUTO  
Select this when you want to enjoy surround sound with its full  
dynamic range (no effect applied).  
• ON  
When you play DVDs recorded in the pictures height/width ratio  
of 4:3, the system adjust the ratio of output signal automatically.  
4:3 LB/4:3 MULTI LB (Letter Box conversion)  
Select this when the aspect ratio of your TV is 4:3 (conventional  
TV). While viewing a wide screen picture, the black bars appear  
on the top and the bottom of the screen.  
4:3 PS/4:3 MULTI PS (Pan Scan conversion)  
Select this when the aspect ratio of your TV is 4:3 (conventional  
TV). While viewing a wide screen picture, the black bars do not  
appear, however, the left and right edges of the pictures will not  
be shown on the screen.  
Select this when you want to fully apply the compression effect  
(useful at midnight).  
NOTE  
• When you play a multichannel Dolby Digital source with the  
surround mode is off, the setting of D. RANGE COMPRESSION is set  
to ON automatically.  
: Speaker setting menu (SPK. SETTING)  
7 Level menu (LEVEL)  
FRONT LEFT SPEAKER/FRONT RIGHT SPEAKER/CENTER  
SPEAKER/SURROUND RIGHT SPEAKER/SURROUND LEFT  
SPEAKER  
While monitoring the test tone, adjust the center and surround  
speakers volume as much as that of the front speakers.  
You can adjust the output level in the –6 dB to +6 dB range.  
Ex.: 16:9  
Ex.: 4:3 LB  
Ex.: 4:3 PS  
NOTE  
• Even if “4:3 PS” or “4:3 MULTI PS” is selected, the screen size may  
become “4:3 LB” or “4:3 MULTI LB” with some DVDs. This depends  
on how DVDs are recorded.  
• When selecting “MULTI” options as the monitor type for the multi-  
color system TV, the system outputs PAL or NTSC video signal  
according to the disc/file, regardless of the scan mode setting (see  
page 17).  
TEST TONE*  
Outputs the test tone.  
* The test tone comes out of all of the activated speakers in the  
following sequence:  
Front left speaker Z Center speaker Z Front right speaker  
Z Surround right speaker Z Surround left speaker Z (back  
to the beginning)  
7 PICTURE SOURCE  
When you set the scan mode to the progressive mode (see page 17),  
you can obtain optimal picture quality by selecting whether the  
content on the disc/file is processed by frame (film source) or by  
field (video source).  
NOTE  
• For adjustment of subwoofer output level, see page 36.  
Normally set to AUTO”.  
• AUTO  
7 Delay menu (DELAY)  
FRONT LEFT SPEAKER/FRONT RIGHT SPEAKER/CENTER  
SPEAKER/SURROUND RIGHT SPEAKER/SURROUND LEFT  
SPEAKER  
Used to play a disc/file containing both video and film source  
materials.  
This system recognizes the source type (video or film) of the  
current disc/file according to the disc/file information.  
If the playback picture is unclear or noisy, or the oblique lines of  
the picture are rough, try to change to other modes.  
• FILM  
Suitable for playing back a film source disc/file.  
• VIDEO  
Suitable for playing back a video source disc/file.  
Adjust the distance from the listening position to the speakers.  
Within the range from 0 ms to 15 ms (by 1 ms).  
Example:  
Center speaker  
Subwoofer  
1 ms  
Front right  
Front left  
0 ms  
0 ms  
7 SCREEN SAVER (See page 20.)  
3.0 m  
2.7 m  
2.4 m  
You can activate or deactivate screen saver function.  
7 FILE TYPE  
2.1 m  
Surround left  
When several types of files are recorded on a disc/device, you can  
select which files to play.  
2 ms  
Surround right  
2 ms  
• AUDIO  
Select this to play MP3/WMA files.  
• STILL PICTURE  
1 ms increase (or decrease) in delay time corresponds to about  
30 cm decrease (or increase) in distance.  
Select this to play JPEG files.  
• VIDEO  
Select this to play ASF/MPEG-2/MPEG-1/DivX files.  
Set to “0 ms” for the furthest speaker from your position as the basis  
for the delay time setting.  
In this case, set the delay time of each speaker as follows;  
• Delay time of front speakers: 0 ms  
• Delay time of center speaker: 1 ms  
• Delay time of surround speakers: 2 ms  
35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting DVD preferences  
7 Subwoofer menu (SUBWOOFER)  
: Other setting menu (OTHERS)  
LEVEL  
You can set the output level of the subwoofer in the –6 dB to +6 dB  
range.  
7 RESUME  
You can activate or deactivate Resume Playback function. (See page  
28.)  
CROSS OVER  
The signals below the preset frequency level will be sent to and be  
reproduced by the subwoofer.  
7 ON SCREEN GUIDE  
Select one of the crossover frequency levels according to the size of  
the small speaker connected.  
120Hz: Select when the cone speaker unit built in the speaker is  
about 8 cm.  
150Hz: Select when the cone speaker unit built in the speaker is  
about 6 cm.  
200Hz: Select when the cone speaker unit built in the speaker is  
about 5 cm.  
You can activate or deactivate the on-screen guide icons. (See page  
19.)  
7 DivX registration menu (DivX REGISTRATION)  
The system has its own Registration Code for DivX playback.  
You can confirm the code of your system.  
• Once you play back a disc created by using the Registration Code,  
the system’s code is overwritten by a totally different new one for  
copyright protection purpose.  
Tuner operations  
IMPORTANT  
Before using the remote control for the  
following operation;  
Setting the AM tuner interval  
spacing  
Some countries space AM stations 9 kHz apart, and some countries  
use 10 kHz spacing.  
1
Set the remote control mode selector to  
AUDIO.  
2
Press FM/AM.  
You can only change the AM tuner interval spacing while selecting  
AM as the band.  
The buttons described below are used on pages 36 and 37.  
On the center unit ONLY:  
7 To change the interval spacing into 10 kHz  
Press 8 while holding down 7.  
7 To change the interval spacing into 9 kHz  
Press 3 while holding down 7.  
Manual tuning  
Number  
buttons  
On the remote control:  
1 Press FM/AM repeatedly to select the  
Remote  
control mode  
selector  
band.  
Example: When the system is tuned in to AM 810 kHz.  
Cursor  
(3/2)  
2 Press TUNING 9/( repeatedly until  
you find the frequency you want.  
When you hold down the button until the system starts  
searching for stations and then release it, the system stops  
searching automatically when a station of sufficient signal  
strength is tuned in to.  
On the center unit:  
1 Press SOURCE repeatedly to select the  
band (FM or AM).  
2 Press TUNING +/– repeatedly until you  
find the frequency you want.  
NOTE  
• When an FM stereo program is received, the ST indicator lights on  
the display window.  
36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
See page 36 for button locations.  
Tuner operations  
Preset tuning  
Selecting the FM reception  
mode  
When the stereo FM program currently tuned in is noisy, you can  
change the FM reception mode to improve the reception.  
Once a station is assigned to a channel number, the station can be  
quickly tuned in. You can preset 30 FM and 15 AM stations.  
7 To preset the stations  
7 While listening to an FM station  
1 Tune in the station you want to preset.  
Press FM MODE.  
• If you want to store the FM reception mode for an FM  
station, select the reception mode you want. See “Selecting  
the FM reception mode” on the right column.  
The FM reception mode appears on the display window.  
Each time you press the button, the FM reception mode changes.  
• AUTO:  
Example: When the system is tuned in to FM 103.50 MHz.  
When a program is broadcast in stereo, you will hear stereo  
sound. (The ST indicator lights on the display window.) When in  
monaural, you will hear monaural sound. This mode is also  
useful to suppress static noise between stations.  
• MONO:  
Reception will be improved although you will lose the stereo  
effect. (The MONO indicator lights on the display window.) In  
this mode, you will hear noise until you are tuned in to a station.  
2 Press MEMORY.  
While “CH” and “_ _” are flashing:  
Reducing the noise of AM  
broadcast  
When listening to an AM broadcast with a lot of noise interference,  
you can change the Beat Cut mode to reduce the noise.  
3 Press number button(s) (1-10, h10) to  
select a preset number you want.  
• For details on using the number buttons, see “How to use the  
number buttons. (See page 21.)  
Example: When the preset channel 1 is selected.  
7 While listening to an AM station  
Press FM MODE.  
The current Beat Cut mode appears on the display window.  
Each time you press the button, the Beat Cut mode changes.  
• Choose “BEATCUT1” or “BEATCUT2” according to which gives  
clearer sound.  
If the setting is canceled before you finish, start from step 2  
again.  
While the selected number is flashing:  
4 Press MEMORY.  
“STORED” appears on the display window.  
The station is assigned to the selected preset number.  
If the setting is canceled before you finish, start from step 2  
again.  
5 Repeat steps 1 to 4.  
• Storing a new station to a used number erases the previously  
stored one.  
7 To tune in to a preset station  
1 Press FM/AM repeatedly to select FM or  
AM.  
2 Press number button(s) (1-10, h10) to  
select a preset number.  
• For details on using the number buttons, see “How to use the  
number buttons. (See page 21.)  
NOTE  
• You can also select a preset number by pressing Cursor 3/2.  
37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
References  
To clean the disc  
Wipe the disc with a soft cloth in a straight line  
from center to edge.  
Maintenance  
• DO NOT use any solvent — such as  
conventional record cleaner, spray,  
thinner or benzine — to clean the disc.  
7 Handling Discs  
• Remove the disc from its case by holding it at  
the edge while pressing the center hole lightly.  
• Do not touch the shiny surface of the disc or  
bend the disc.  
7 Cleaning the system  
• Stains on the system should be wiped off with a soft cloth. If the  
system is heavily stained, wipe it with a cloth soaked in water-  
diluted neutral detergent and wrung well, then wipe clean with a  
dry cloth.  
• Put the disc back in its case after use to  
prevent warping.  
• Be careful not to scratch the surface of the disc  
when placing it back in its case.  
• Avoid exposure to direct sunlight, extreme  
temperature and moisture.  
• Since the system may deteriorate in quality, become damaged or  
get its paint peeled off, be careful about the following.  
DO NOT wipe it with a hard cloth.  
DO NOT wipe it forcefully.  
DO NOT wipe it with thinner or benzine.  
DO NOT apply any volatile substance such as insecticides to it.  
DO NOT allow any rubber or plastic to remain in contact with  
it for a long time.  
Troubleshooting  
PROBLEM  
POSSIBLE CAUSE  
SOLUTION  
Power does not come on. The power cord and/or system cord is not connected.  
Connect the power cord and system cord correctly. (See  
pages 11 and 12.)  
The remote control does The batteries are exhausted.  
Replace the batteries. (See page 7.)  
not work.  
Sunlight is shining directly on the remote sensor.  
Hide the remote sensor from direct sunlight.  
No sound.  
The system cord and/or speaker cord is not connected. Check the connection.  
The audio cord is not connected to AUX IN (VCR) and/ Connect the cord correctly. (See page 12.)  
or DIGITAL IN (DBS) correctly.  
An incorrect source has been selected.  
The video cord is not connected correctly.  
The disc or file is not playable.  
Select the correct source. (See page 16.)  
Connect the cord correctly. (See page 11.)  
Use a playable disc or file. (See pages 3 and 4.)  
No picture is displayed  
on the TV screen.  
No picture is displayed  
on the TV screen, the  
The scan mode is set to the progressive mode  
Change the scan mode to the interlace mode  
(“NT. 480I” or “PAL. 576I”). (See page 17.)  
(“NT. 480P” or “PAL. 576P”) though the center unit is  
picture is blurred, or the connected to the TV which does not support the  
picture is divided into  
two parts.  
progressive video input such as a conventional TV.  
Video and audio are  
distorted.  
The disc is scratched or dirty.  
Replace or clean the disc.  
A VCR is connected between the center unit and the  
TV.  
Connect the center unit and TV directly. (See page 11.)  
The picture does not fit The monitor type is not set correctly.  
the TV screen.  
Set “MONITOR TYPE” properly. (See page 35.)  
The broadcast is hard to Antennas are disconnected.  
hear because of noise.  
Reconnect the antennas correctly and securely. (See  
page 8.)  
If there are any other cases than the noted above or if this system does not seem to work properly, turn off the system and turn it back on.  
38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
References  
7 Subwoofer (SP-PWC60)  
Specifications  
7 Center unit (XV-THC60/XV-THC30)  
Audio section  
Amplifier section  
Front/Center/Surround:  
135 W per channel, RMS at 4 at  
1 kHz, with 10 % total harmonic  
distortion.  
Subwoofer:  
135 W, RMS at 4 at 100 Hz, with  
10 % total harmonic distortion.  
Digital input*:  
DIGITAL IN (DBS):  
(OPTICAL)  
–21 dBm to –15 dBm  
(660 nm E30 nm)  
Speaker section  
* Corresponding to Linear PCM, Dolby Digital, and DTS Digital  
Surround (with sampling frequency — 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz,  
48 kHz)  
Speaker unit:  
16 cm Bass-reflex  
Power Handling Capacity: 140 W  
Impedance:  
Frequency Range:  
Sound Pressure Level:  
General  
Power Requirements:  
4 Ω  
Analog input:  
AUX IN (VCR)  
30 Hz to 200 Hz  
75 dB/W·m  
Video section  
Video System:  
Horizontal Resolution:  
Signal-to-Noise Ratio:  
Video output level  
Composite:  
PAL/NTSC  
500 lines  
64 dB  
AC 110 V/ AC 127 V/  
AC 220 - 240 V  
, 50/60 Hz  
Power Consumption:  
Dimensions (W M H M D):  
Mass:  
135 W (at operation)  
0 W (in standby mode)  
1.0 V(p-p)/75 Ω  
1.0 V(p-p)/75 Ω  
S-video-Y:  
S-video-C:  
171 mm M 411 mm M 458 mm  
For PAL: 0.3 V(p-p)/75 Ω  
For NTSC: 0.286 V(p-p)/75 Ω  
1.0 V(p-p)/75 Ω  
12.3 kg  
Component-Y:  
Component-PB/PR:  
Video input sensitivity/Impedance (VCR IN)  
0.7 V(p-p)/75 Ω  
7 Subwoofer (SP-PWC30)  
Amplifier section  
Front/Center/Surround:  
Composite:  
S-video-Y:  
S-video-C:  
1.0 V(p-p)/75 Ω  
1.0 V(p-p)/75 Ω  
For PAL: 0.3 V(p-p)/75 Ω  
For NTSC: 0.286 V(p-p)/75 Ω  
135 W per channel, RMS at 4 at  
1 kHz, with 10 % total harmonic  
distortion.  
135 W, RMS at 4 at 100 Hz, with  
10 % total harmonic distortion.  
Subwoofer:  
USB storage  
USB specification:  
Compatible with the USB 2.0 Full-  
Speed  
Speaker section  
Speaker unit:  
Power Handling Capacity: 140 W  
Impedance:  
Compatible device:  
Compatible file system:  
Bus power supply:  
Mass Storage Class  
FAT16, FAT32  
Max. 500 mA  
16 cm Bass-reflex  
4 Ω  
Frequency Range:  
Sound Pressure Level:  
General  
30 Hz to 200 Hz  
74 dB/W·m  
Tuner section  
Tuning Range  
FM:  
87.50 MHz to 108.00 MHz  
At 10 kHz intervals  
530 kHz to 1 710 kHz  
At 9 kHz intervals  
531 kHz to 1 710 kHz  
Power Requirements:  
AC 110 V/ AC 127 V/  
AM:  
AC 220 - 240 V  
, 50/60 Hz  
Power Consumption:  
Dimensions (W M H M D):  
Mass:  
135 W (at operation)  
0 W (in standby mode)  
General  
Power Requirements:  
Power Consumption:  
170 mm M 411 mm M 458 mm  
AC 110-240 V  
, 50/60 Hz  
11.5 kg  
25 W (at operation)  
1.2 W (in standby mode)  
Dimensions (W M H M D):  
400 mm M 85 mm M 316 mm  
Mass:  
3.8 kg  
39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
References  
7 Satellite Speakers (SP-XTHC60)  
Front speakers (SP-THC60F)  
7 Satellite Speakers (SP-XTHC30)  
Front speakers (SP-THC40F)  
Type:  
1-way 2-speaker Bass reflex type  
Type:  
2-way 2-speaker Bass reflex type  
(Magnetically shielded Type)  
(Magnetically shielded Type)  
8.0 cm cone M 1  
Speaker:  
5.5 cm cone M 2  
Speaker:  
Power Handling Capacity: 140 W  
1.5 cm dome M 1  
Impedance:  
Frequency Range:  
4 Ω  
Power Handling Capacity: 140 W  
Impedance:  
Frequency Range:  
Sound Pressure Level:  
Dimensions (W M H M D):  
100 Hz to 20 000 Hz  
79 dB/W·m  
4 Ω  
Sound Pressure Level:  
Dimensions (W M H M D):  
80 Hz to 20 000 Hz  
78 dB/W·m  
280 mm M 1 106 mm M 280 mm  
Mass:  
3.3 kg each  
104.5 mm M 139 mm M 101 mm  
Mass:  
0.56 kg each  
Center speaker (SP-THC60C)  
Type:  
Center speaker (SP-THC40C)  
Type:  
1-way 2-speaker Bass reflex type  
(Magnetically shielded Type)  
2-way 2-speaker Bass reflex type  
Speaker:  
6.5 cm cone M 2  
(Magnetically shielded Type)  
8.0 cm cone M 1  
Power Handling Capacity: 140 W  
Speaker:  
Impedance:  
Frequency Range:  
4 Ω  
1.5 cm dome M 1  
90 Hz to 20 000 Hz  
82 dB/W·m  
Power Handling Capacity: 140 W  
Impedance:  
Frequency Range:  
Sound Pressure Level:  
Dimensions (W M H M D):  
Sound Pressure Level:  
Dimensions (W M H M D):  
4 Ω  
80 Hz to 20 000 Hz  
78 dB/W·m  
250 mm M 85 mm M 91 mm  
Mass:  
0.8 kg  
137 mm M 105 mm M 104.5 mm  
Surround speakers (SP-THC60S)  
Type:  
Speaker:  
Mass:  
0.57 kg  
2-way 3-speaker Bass reflex type  
Surround speakers (SP-THC40S)  
Type:  
Speaker:  
Power Handling Capacity: 140 W  
Impedance:  
Frequency Range:  
Sound Pressure Level:  
Dimensions (W M H M D):  
5.5 cm cone M 2  
3.0 cm dome M 1  
1-way Bass reflex type  
8.0 cm cone M 1  
Power Handling Capacity: 140 W  
Impedance:  
Frequency Range:  
Sound Pressure Level:  
Dimensions (W M H M D):  
4 Ω  
100 Hz to 20 000 Hz  
79 dB/W·m  
4 Ω  
80 Hz to 20 000 Hz  
71 dB/W·m  
280 mm M 1 114 mm M 280 mm  
Mass:  
3.4 kg each  
111.5 mm M 148 mm M 106.5 mm  
Mass:  
0.56 kg each  
Designs & specifications are subject to change without notice.  
40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Mains (AC) Line Instruction  
Instrução sobre a tensão da rede eléctrica (CA)  
CAUTION for mains (AC) line  
BEFORE PLUGGING IN, do check that your mains (AC) line voltage corresponds  
with the position of the voltage selector switch provided on the outside of this  
equipment and, if different, reset the voltage selector switch, to prevent from a  
damage or risk of fire/electric shock.  
PRECAUÇÃO para a ligação à tensão da rede (CA)  
ANTES DE LIGAR O APARELHO A UMA TOMADA DA REDE, verifique se a  
tensão da rede CA corresponde à posição do selector de voltagem localizado na  
parte externa deste equipamento. Caso não corresponda, reajuste o selector de  
voltagem a fim de evitar avarias ou riscos de incêndio e choque eléctrico.  
EN, PR  
© 2006 Victor Company of Japan, Limited  
0806RYMMDWJSC  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Insignia CRT Television NS 42E470A13A User Manual
Invacare Hot Tub 3752G User Manual
JVC Car Speaker KD HDR60 User Manual
Kalorik Coffee Grinder USK CCG080626 User Manual
Kathrein Satellite TV System UFD 430 User Manual
Kenwood Stereo System XD 6051 User Manual
Keys Fitness Home Gym ST ARM User Manual
KitchenAid Refrigerator 2205264 User Manual
Knoll Systems Projector HDO2200 User Manual
Kramer Electronics Welder SG 6 User Manual